Home

Philips 9FF2M4 Digital Photo Frame User Manual

1. BitO Channel f o Bit8 Channel 002 Bit 15 Bit 16 003 Bit 23 Bit 24 Channel 004 Bit 31 Count 32 Bits Count Channel Totalizer 005 Gate Gate LR 16 Bits 7 Pise at Channel I DAC 1L 006 16 Bits I DAC 2H Channel 1 DAC 2L 007 L4400 User s Guide 243 10 14452 Multifunction Module with DIO D A and Totalizer L4452A D Sub Connector CNT GND BIT BIT BIT BT BIT BIT p BIT BIT BT BIT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 O 9 9 9 9 50 Pin D Sub EIN Female Connector ono care Gre 87 87 BT qao BT BT OF BT OT G 9 69 6 G9 9 G9 9 9 G DAC DAC DAC BT BIT GND NC oH 4L GND s 2 CO 2 2 Description Description Socket Bit 0 4 Count GND Bit 1 5 i 27 Channel 5 Count No Connect Bit 2 7 28 Totalizer Gate Channel 1 i Channel 3 Bit 4 9 i 31 DAC 1L Bits 10 i 32 Chenier Bit 6 11 i 33 DAC 2L Bit 12 i 40 Channel 7 ACH Bit 8 14 i 42 GND Bit 9 15 i 43 GND Bit10 16 i 44 GND Channel 2 Channel 4 25 ane Bit12 21 i 46 GN
2. MATRIX COLUMN 4X8 gt CI C8 4 X 16 gt 1 16 OOOOOOOO0O0000 pooooooooooooQ C10 Cii C12 R5 H L Cis 14 Ci5 C16 R7 poooooooooooQ p MATRIX 2 ABUS 34 When using the 34933T terminal block for 2 wire mode access is provided to the bypass columns through the columns labeled C9 through C16 Follow this wiring convention shown in the table below for both matrices Terminal marked Connects to Terminal marked Connects to C9H C1Hbypass C13H C5H bypass C9L bypass C13L C5L bypass C10H C2H bypass C14H C6H bypass C10L C2L bypass C14L C6L bypass C11H C3H bypass C15H C7H bypass C3L bypass C15L CC7L bypass C12H C4H bypass C16H C8H bypass C12L C4L bypass C16L C8L bypass L4400 User s Guide 123 5 L4433A Dual Quad 4x8 Reed Matrix L4433A Simplified Schematic for One Wire Mode NOTE Although rows are numbered the same across the matrices they are electrically separate from one another Matrix 1 1C1 1C2 1C8 NOTE 1 1 bypass 1 2 bypass 1 8 bypass Matrix Relays Reed non latching Analog Bus Re
3. 1 For orientation the D sub connector end of the module is facing you 29 29C 7NO 12NO 8 4NO 1 13NO 5NO 2 14 10NO 30NO 30C NC 0 O 9 2 9 9 9 9 50 Pin D Sub Reserved 116 7C 12C 8C 4C 1 13C 9C 5C 2C 14C 10 6 GND Male Connector C9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 GND 11 11NC 7 3NC 12NC 8NC 4 1 13NC 9NC 5 2NC 14NC 10 6 6 9 D 69 9 9 9 9 G0 9 9 30 NO 1 Common 25 7 Common 10 Common 13 26 30 Common 16 1NO 8 7 NO 10 NO 13 NO 9 Reserved 18 2 NC 46 8 NC 11 NC 14 NC 47 GND 33 2 Common 29 5 Common 8 Common 11 Common 14 30 GND 34 2 NO 12 5 NO 8 NO 11 NO 14 NO 13 No Connect 17 3 NC 38 6 NC 9 NC 12 NC 29 NO 1 3 Common 21 6 Common 9 Common 12 Common 29 Common 2 3 NO 4 6 NO 9 NO 12 NO Bank 2 31NO 31C 21NO 17NO 26NO 22NO 18NO 15NO 27NO 23NO 19NO 16NO 28 24NO 32NO 32C NC O D D Sub Male Connector Reserved 25C 21C 17C 26C 22C 18C 15C 27C 23C 19C 16C 28C 24C 20C GND GND 25NO 25NC 21NC 17NC 26NC 22NC 18NC 15NC 27NC 23NC 19NC 16NC 28NC 24NC 20NC 20NO
4. 185 7 186 Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver Paired Drive With Combined Position Indicators The simplified schematic below illustrates the connection for a dual drive switch with an integral position indicator The position indicators for this type of switch are electrically connected to the device s drive coil This is a typical arrangement for microwave attenuators For these types of position indicators you must make a parallel connection at the distribution board between the channel drive and the indicator input With these types of devices positive voltage is present on the paired coil opposite the position the switch is currently in Typically you will need to invert the logic level of the position indicator using the ROUTe CHANnel VERify POLarity command As shown Channel 01 was pulsed to close Port 1 The corresponding position indicator also closed The schematic shown is similar to the Agilent 876x series of switches and 849x series of step attenuators 34945EXT Switch Distribution Board Logic Gate Sense IND 11 Drive Port 2 Pull Down Resistor 7 Drive Common Logic Gate Sense Pull Down Resistor Drive Port 1 Pivot Open Collector Armature Output Drivers 1 Port 1 PortC Port2 L4400 User s Guide
5. Description Socket Description 1L 15 3L Sense GND 34 GND 44 1H 16 3H Sense GND 45 1L Sense 31 4L GND 46 1H Sense 32 4H GND 47 2L 11 41 Sense GND 48 2H 12 4H Sense GND 49 2L Sense 27 External Clock GND 50 2H Sense 28 Trigger 25 No Connect 2 3L 5 GND No Connect 10 3H 6 GND No Connect 14 232 14400 User s Guide L4451A 4 Channel Isolated D A Converter with Waveform Memory 34951T Terminal Block L4400 User s Guide 9 Each terminal block is labeled with the model number and the abbreviated instrument name SENSE SENSE SENSE SENSE IGGER HLH L JH L H L hj is 2 2s oooooooooooOQ I XT CLOCK E ae We tl 5 I N L4451A Terminal Block 233 9 L4451A 4 Channel Isolated D A Converter with Waveform Memory THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK 234 14400 User s Guide Agilent 14400 Class Instruments User s Guide 00 ee 10 L4452A Multifunction Module with DIO D A and Totalizer L4452A Multifunction Module 236 L4452A SCPI Command Summary 237 L4452A Example Program Segments 241 L4452A Simplified Block Diagram 243 L4452A D Sub Connector 244 34952T Terminal Block 245 RE Agilent Technologies 235 10 14452 Multifunction Module with DIO D A and Totaliz
6. L4450A 64 Bit Digital 1 0 with Memory and Counter Synchronous Buffered Outputs You can use synchronous mode handshake with buffered memory output operations Buffered operations are described in more detail beginning on page 210 For buffered output operations the HO line acts as a start stop line This line will be set high when the memory output command is executed by the L4450A and will return low when the memory output operation has completed Synchronous memory output operations can be paced using either the internal strobe or an external strobe When using the internal strobe the H1 line is the strobe output line The timing of the output operation when using the default INTernal clock is controlled by the CONFigure DIGital HANDshake RATE command This setting affects strobe width memory clock rate as well as the setup and hold times Alternatively the reciprocal form of the command CONFigure DIGital HANDshake CTIMe can be used to specify the speed in terms of time instead of a rate The timing should be set such that the device receiving the data can latch the data lines during the time The receiving device should detect the leading edge of the strobe line wait for the L4450A to set the data Tpp and then latch the data Latching the data on the trailing edge of the strobe is recommended however you can the data following Tpp ranges from 23 to 23 ns A synchronous buffered output using the int
7. L4421A SCPI Command Summary 14400 User s Guide Table 4 2 lists the instrument specific SCPI commands that apply to the L4421A 40 channel Armature Multiplexer Table 3 3 Chapter 3 lists the SCPI commands that apply to all L4400 series instruments For complete information on all SCPI commands refer to the Programmer s Reference contained on the L4400 Product Reference CD ROM p n 34989 13601 Table 4 2 L4421A SCPI Command Summary 4 Subsystem Commands ROUTe Scan Configuration ABORt INITiate ROUTe CHANnel ADVance SOURce EXTernallBUSIIMMediate ROUTe CHANnel ADVance SOURce ROUTe CHANnel DELay lt ch_list gt ROUTe CHANnel DELay lt ch_list gt 101 4 102 L4421A 40 Channel Armature Multiplexer Switch Control Sequence Operation ROUTe CHANnel DELay AUTO OFFIOIONI1 ch_list ROUTe CHANnel DELay AUTO Q ch list ROUTe CHANnel FWIRe OFFIOIONI1 ch list ROUTe SCAN scan list ROUTe SCAN ROUTe SCAN ADD Q ch list ROUTe SCAN ORDered OFFIOIONI1 ROUTe SCAN ORDered ROUTe SCAN REMove ch list ROUTe SCAN SIZE ROUTe CHANnel LABel CLEar MODule 1 ROUTe CHANnel LABel DEFine lt label gt lt ch_list gt ROUTe CHANnel LABel DEFine USERIFACTory lt ch_list gt ROUTe CLOSe lt ch_list gt ROUTe CLOSe lt ch_list gt ROUTe CLOSe EXCLusive lt ch_list gt ROUTe MODule BUSY 1 ROUTe MODu
8. SYSTem MODule PFAil JUMPer AMP5 1 SYSTem MODule TEMPerature TRANsducerlTTHReshold 1 14400 User s Guide L4437A General Purpose Switch 6 L4437A Example Program Segments 14400 User s Guide The following sections contain example program segments of commonly used instrument functions The channel addressing scheme used in these segments follow the form 1ecc where ccc is the channel number For detailed example programs involving multiple drivers and development environments refer to the L4400 Product Reference CD ROM p n 34989 13601 Opening and Closing Channels Example Closing and opening channels first two commands close channel 3 then channel 5 The last command opens both channel 3 and channel 5 ROUTe CLOSe 1003 ROUTe CLOSe 1005 ROUTe OPEN 1003 1005 Example Querying channels for open or close state The following command returns a 1 true or 0 false state of channel 016 ROUTe CLOSe 1016 ROUTe CLOSe 1016 Returns a 1 ROUTe OPEN 1016 Returns a 0 Reading Jumper State and System Identity Example Querying the power failure state of 5Arelays The following command returns the position of the power fail jumper either MAIN all relays maintain their present state when power fails or OPEN all relays open when power fails If this command is sent to a module other than the L4437A NONE is returned no error is generated SYSTem MODule PFAil JU
9. OOO OO OOO OD Attenuator Screw Terminals COO a gt L4400 User s Guide 14400 User s Guide Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver 7 Y1153A Attenuator connector P101 and P102 84904 5 8 Pin N C 5 00091 10000209 Use Section 1 Thru Line N C Section 2 Thru Line Section 4 Atten Section 3 Atten 10 Use Section 1 Atten Section 3 Thru Line Section 4 Thru Line Section 2 Atten VR You may use either the ribbon cable header or the screw terminals to make connections to the attenuators You should not use both 84904 5 6 7 8 Item Cable Type Y1153A Connector Attenuator Connector Cable Wiring Description 10 conductor ribbon cable 0 050 pitch 26 or 28 AWG stranded 10 pin socket connector 0 1 x 0 1 pin grid IDC termination center polarizing key 10 pin socket connector 0 1 x 0 1 pin grid IDC termination center polarizing key Example Part Numbers 3M 3801 10 26 AWG 3M 3365 10 28 AWG 3M P N 89110 0101 AMP P N 76288 1 3M P N 89110 0101 AMP P N 76288 1 Y1153A connector pin 1 to attenuator connector pin 1 171 7 Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver 8494 5 6 Item Cable Supplied with Attenuator Cable Type Y1153A Connection Attenuator Connector Cabl
10. is 0 ns Since 0 ns the sending device can use the trailing edge of the strobe to initiate a change in the data lines A synchronous unbuffered input is shown in the diagram below default handshake line polarity CYCLE 2 H1 Strobe lt rie gt SEP HOLD Data In Don t Care X vaa X Don t Care For example the following SCPI commands set the L4450A to have a 16 bit input using synchronous handshake Two data inputs are then performed and the strobe line is pulsed for each query The I O direction line is set high following the first SENSe DIGital DATA WORD query and remains high until the digital channel is reset or reconfigured CONF DIG WIDT WORD 01101 CONF DIG DIR INP 91101 CONF DIG HAND SYNC 01101 SENS DIG DATA WORD 601101 SENS DIG DATA WORD 91101 L4400 User s Guide 205 206 L4450A 64 Bit Digital 1 0 with Memory and Counter Synchronous Unbuffered Outputs For synchronous handshake unbuffered outputs the HO line indicates the direction of the transfer This line is set low to indicate an output operation The HO line will remain in the low state until the L4450A direction is changed The H1 line is the strobe output line When the L4450A executes an output command it sets the data lines and waits for 2 before asserting the strobe line The leading edge of the strobe indicates the data is valid The strobe line is asserte
11. 15 NC 18 NC 21 NC 24 NC 27 NC 32 NO 15 Common 25 18 Common 21 Common 24 Common 27 26 32 Common 16 15 NO 8 18 NO 21 NO 24 NO 27 NO 9 Reserved 18 16 NC 46 19 NC 22 NC 25 NC 28 NC 47 GND 33 16 Common 29 19 Common 22 Common 25 Common 28 30 GND 34 16 NO 12 19 NO 22 NO 25 NO 28 NO 13 No Connect 17 17 NC 38 20 NC 23 NC 26 NC 31 NO 1 17 Common 21 20 Common 23 Common 26 Common 31 Common 2 17 NO 4 20 NO 23 NO 26 NO L4400 User s Guide 133 6 134 L4437A General Purpose Switch 34937T Terminal Block This terminal block with screw type connections is labeled with the model number and the abbreviated module name ooooooooooo0oQ 29 1 2 hl 30 NO C NO C C NC NO C NO C NC C NC NO C NC NO C NC 3 4 5 6 OoOOOOOOOOO000 OoOOOOOOOOOO00 ooooooooooo0Q 15 16 NO C NC NO C NC h NO c NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC 17 18 19 20 OoOOOOOOOO0000 OOOOOOO00000 I 1 I lt Warning the insulation of the wiring used with the terminal block must be rated for the highest voltage that will be present on the terminal block Pads for user supplied snubber circuity to alleviate reactive transients The circuits may consist of resistors capacitors varistors or other elements as needed to
12. L4452A Verification The test connection for verifying the DAC output voltage on channels 6 and 7 of the L4452A are shown in Figure A 3 z 7 lt L4452A Terminal Block 9 12 12 14 15 un 24 25 25 127 28 29 30 31 eeeeeeeeeeee leeeeeeoooeeo s mu TCT cif OTALIZER D 7 twist wires DMM apr 9 0 c Figure A 3 L4452A DAC Output Connections Channels 6 and 7 DAC Output Verification Test This procedure is used to check the calibration of the DAC outputs on channels 6 and 7 of the L4452A Verification checks are performed only for those output values with unique calibration constants 1 With the DMM disconnected from the L4452A set the DMM to the 100V range or the lowest range that can measure 16V do not use autorange 2 Short the inputs to the DMM The DMM reading is the offset voltage for the selected range If the DMM has null capability turn it on at L4400 User s Guide 261 262 L4451A and L4452A Calibration Procedures this time Otherwise record the offset which will be subtracted from the subsequent voltage measurements Connect channel 6 of th
13. You can connect multiple matrix modules externally and or through the analog buses for applications that require large matrices For information on linking multiple matrix modules refer to page 116 of this chapter When the power is off matrix relays and analog bus relays open 119 5 120 L4433A Dual Quad 4x8 Reed Matrix L4433A Simplified Schematic for Two Wire Mode Row 1 Row 2 Row 3 Row 4 Row 5 Row 6 Row 7 Row 8 NOTE Matrix Relays Reed non latching Matrix 1 Analog Bus relays Armature non latching Col1H Col 1L Col2H 2L Col8H Col 8L ca NOTE Although columns C1H bypass C1L bypass C2H bypass C2L bypass C8H bypass C8L bypass numbered the same on Matrix o 1 and Matrix 2 they are i 5 5 5 5 electrically separate from one i MEM L another NOTE All series resistors shown 1000 H 4 4 4 4 4 4 eo 4 NOTE Three digit channel numbers derived from the intersection of the rows and columns columns having two digits The intersection shown here represents Channel 308 Row 3 Column 8 Matrix 2 Col 1H Col 1L Col 2H Col 2L Col 8H Col 8L C1L C8H C8L C1H bypass C1L bypass C2H bypass C2L bypass C8H bypass C8L bypass o o i i i i Analog Buses H L L
14. 10 14 15 mA 18 5 20 23 1 Apply a measured 0 offset this measurement 14400 User s Guide 14400 User s Guide L4451A and L4452A Calibration Procedures A Table A 2 L4451A Output Current and Voltage Levels cont d Output Voltage Error From Nominal 90 day 16V 11 mV 12V 9mV 10V 8mV 8V 7 4V 5mV oV 3mV 4V 5mV 8V 7mV 10V 8mV 12V 9 mV 16V 11 mV Analog Output Adjustments The following analog output adjustment procedures are to be performed following a 1 hour warm up period This procedure results in the L4451A setting a zero adjustment and a gain adjustment constant for each DAC output You must perform all the adjustments on one analog output channel before adjusting the other analog output channels The procedure can be aborted at any time using the command CALibration ABORt lt channel gt Each of the four DAC channels is calibrated separately for voltage and current A DMM capable of measuring up to 12V and 22 mA is required A calibrated 6 5 digit DMM is recommended There are 88 calibration points required to calibrate the voltage and current on all four DAC channels so automation of the procedure is highly recommended 257 258 L4451A and 14452 Calibration Procedures Voltage Adjustments 1 With the DMM disconnected from the L4451A set the DMM to the 100V ran
15. SOURce FUNCtion TRIGger SOURce lt ch_list gt SOURce MODE VOLTagelCURRent lt ch_list gt SOURce MODE Q ch list SOURce MODule CLOCk FREQuency lt frequency gt IMINIMAXIDEF 1 SOURce MODule CLOCk FREQuency MINIMAX 1 SOURce MODule CLOCk STATe OFFIOIONI1 1 SOURce MODule CLOCk STATe 1 SOURce MODule TRIGger EXTernal IMMediate 1 SOURce MODule TRIGger OUTPut OFFIOIONI1 1 SOURce MODule TRIGger OUTPut 1 SOURce VOLTage LEVel lt voltage gt IMINIMAXIDEF ch list SOURce VOLTage LEVel MINIMAX 8 ch list Configuration Trace SOURce FUNCtion CLOCk EXTernal DlVisor lt value gt IMINIMAXIDEF Waveform ch list Mad SOURce FUNCtion CLOCk EXTernal DIVisor MINIMAX G ch list Configuration souRce FUNCtion CLOCk SOURCce INTernallEXTernallSTEP ch list SOURce FUNCtion CLOCKk SOURce ch list SOURce FUNCtion CURRent GAIN gain IMINIMAXIDEF ch list SOURce FUNCtion CURRent GAIN MINIMAX ch list 226 L4400 User s Guide L4451A 4 Channel Isolated D A Converter with Waveform Memory SOURce FUNCtion CURRent OFFSet lt offset gt IMINIMAXIDEF lt ch_list gt SOURce FUNCtion CURRent OFFSet MINIMAX lt ch_list gt SOURce FUNCtion ENABle OFFIOIONI1 lt ch_list gt SOURce FUNCtion ENABle Q ch list SOURce FUNCtion FREQuency lt frequency gt IMINIMAXIDEF Q ch list SOURce FUNCtion FREQuency M
16. Y1155A LED Connectors LED1 and LED2 LED1 Connector Use VI VI VI VI VI VI VI VI Pin 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver 20000002020 10000000201 NEN Use SW1 5 1 Sw SW2 SWS SWS SW4 SW4 U gt gt D wo gt Pin 13 18 LED2 Connector Use Pin Use VI 2 SW5 VI 4 SW5 VI 6 SW6 VI 8 SW6 VI 10 SW7 VI 12 SW7 VI 14 SW8 VI 16 SW8 gt gt wo gt 14400 User s Guide 183 7 184 Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver Simplified Connection Diagrams Single Drive With Separate Position Indicators The simplified schematic below illustrates the connection for a single drive switch with separate position indicators The position indicators for this type of switch are independent relay contacts that are mechanically linked to the RF switch position Even though this is a single drive switch each switch state has its own coil The switch uses internal logic to open all paths except the one being closed The RF paths are not shown in the simplified diagram The coils are driven in open collector mode The position indicator is set so that a high level indicates an active switch The logic level of the position indicator can be inverted using the ROUTe CHANnel VERify POLarity command The schematic shown is similar to the Agilent 87104A B C 87106A B C and 8
17. Description 16 conductor ribbon cable 0 050 pitch 26 or 28 AWG stranded 16 pin socket connector 0 1 x 0 1 pin grid IDC termination center polarizing key 16 pin socket connector 0 1 x 0 1 pin grid IDC termination center polarizing key Y1151A connector pin 1 to switch connector 1 1 Example Part Numbers 3M 3801 16 26 AWG 3M 3365 16 28 AWG 3M P N 89116 0101 AMP P N 76288 3 3M P N 89116 0101 AMP P N 76288 3 161 7 162 Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver Y1151A Switch Control All channels are single drive Path Closed Path Open SW1 Path 1 ROUT CLOS xx01 Close another path or open all SW1 Path 2 ROUT CLOS xx02 Close another path or open all SW1 Path 3 ROUT CLOS xx03 Close another path or open all SW1 Path 4 ROUT CLOS xx04 Close another path or open all SW1 Path 5 ROUT CLOS xx05 Close another path or open all SW1 Path 6 ROUT CLOS xx06 Close another path or open all SW1 Open All 1 ROUT CLOS xx07 SW2 Open All 1 ROUT CLOS xx08 Path Closed Path Open SW2 Path 1 ROUT CLOS xx11 Close another path or open all SW2 Path 2 ROUT CLOS xx12 Close another path or open all SW2 Path 3 ROUT CLOS xx13 Close another path or open all SW2Path 4 ROUT CLOS xx14 Close another path or open all SW2 Path 5 ROUT CLOS xx15 Close another path or open all SW2 Path 6 ROUT CLOS xx16 Close another path or open all SW Open All 2 ROUT CLOS xx17 SW2 Open All 2 ROUT C
18. DriverSetup Model AgilentL44XX Open a session to the instrument and reset the instrument host Initialize GPIB 9 false true standardinitoptions Get a handle to thg L4452 moduel personality I gilentL4452 multiFunc I AgilentL4452 host Personality 19 Solution Explorer c Properties respStr host System get_CardType 1 Console WUriteLihe Card type was respStr Compile Custom Tool change address string example source code Figure 3 5 Changing the Instrument Address String IVI COM Programs Visual Basic NET When using the IVI COM examples with Visual BASIC NET you are prompted to enter change the instrument s address string after starting the program To modify IVI COM Visual Basic examples for use with with your instrument open the example in the MVI COM subdirectory for your development environment by double clicking the example name with the vbproj extension L4400 User s Guide Operating and Programming 3 Figure 3 6 is an example of the window used during program execution to change the address string EZ_34952A_MultiFunction Microsoft Visual Basic NET run Form1 vb Read Only File Edit View Project Build Debug Tools Window Help B amp Release 089 Init withOptions n m AssemblyInfo vb Form1 vb Design Formi vb Object Browser Solution Explorer EZ 34952A Mul 2 Form1 k a E olution EZ 349524 MultiFunction 1 p EZ 34952A
19. MINIMAX TRIGger DELay lt seconds gt IMINIMAX TRIGger DELay MINIMAX TRIGger DELay AUTO OFFIOIONI1 TRIGger DELay AUTO TRIGger SOURce IMMediatelBUSIEXTernallTIMer TRIGger SOURce TRIGger SOURce ALARm MODE SINGlelCONTinuous TRIGger SOURce ALARm MODE TRIGger TIMer lt seconds gt IMINIMAXIDEF TRIGger TIMer MINIMAX TRIGger COUNt lt count gt IMINIMAXIDEFIINFinity TRIGger COUNt MINIMAX TRIGger SOURce IMMediatelBUSIEXTernallALARm1lALARmo 2ITIMer TRIGger SOURce TRIGger TIMer lt seconds gt IMINIMAXIDEF TRIGger TIMer MINIMAX Data Reading Memory Measure ment Statistics DATA POINts EVENt THReshold num readings DATA POINts EVENt THReshold DATA POINts DATA REMove lt num_readings gt FETCh R lt max_count gt SYSTem TIME SCAN DATA LAST lt channel gt L4400 User s Guide L4450A 64 Bit Digital 1 0 with Memory and Counter L4450A 64 Bit Digital 1 0 with Memory and Counter 14400 User s Guide The L4450A has 64 bits of general purpose digital I O grouped in 8 bit channels with programmable polarity input thresholds and output levels The module is segmented into two banks of four 8 bit channels Each bank has 64 Kb of volatile memory for pattern capture and pattern generation with hardware interrupt capability Up to three pins of handshaking are available for each bank of 32 bits The module also has two 10 MHz frequency co
20. NY DMM foor P e Q 9 C50 9 twist wires Output current verification Figure A 1 L4451A Output Current Connections 254 14400 User s Guide L4451A and 14452 Calibration Procedures L H L L 1s 01 2 2 1 L4451A Terminal Block T CLOCK 5 SENSE I1 EX Q a e 3 gt o H H LJH L Le twist wires DMM apr 66 Sox diee c I il Output Voltage verification L4400 User s Guide Figure A 2 L4451A Output Voltage Connections Analog Output Verification Test This procedure is used to check the calibration of the current and voltage outputs on the L4451A 4 channel DAC Verification checks are performed only for those output values with unique calibration constants Current Output Verification 1 With the DMM disconnected from the L4451A set the DMM to the 100mA range or the lowest range that can measure 20 do not use autorange The DMM reading is the current offset for the selected range If the DMM has null capability turn it on at this time Otherwise record the offset which will be subtracted from the subsequent current measurements Connect channel 1 of the L4451A as shown in Figure 1 Confi
21. Path closed ROUT OPEN xx01 ROUT OPEN xx02 ROUT OPEN xx03 ROUT OPEN xx04 ROUT OPEN xx05 ROUT OPEN xx06 State A ROUT OPEN xx07 ROUT OPEN xx08 Path open ROUT CLOS xx01 ROUT CLOS xx02 ROUT CLOS 9xx03 ROUT CLOS 9xx04 ROUT CLOS 9xx05 ROUT CLOS 9xx06 State B ROUT CLOS xx07 ROUT CLOS 9xx08 For switches connected to SW1 note the path closed is accomplished with the ROUTe OPEN command L4400 User s Guide 167 7 Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver Y1152A LED Connectors LED1 and LED2 2 O O O O O QO 16 10000000201 LED1 Connector LED2 Connector Pin Use Pin Use Pin Use Pin Use 1 VI 2 SW1 Close 1 1 VI 2 SW1 Close 5 3 VI 4 SW1 Open 1 3 VI 4 SW1 Open 5 5 VI 6 SW1 Close 2 5 VI 6 SW1 Close 6 7 VI 8 SW1 Open 2 1 VI 8 SW1 Open 6 9 VI 10 SW1 Close 3 9 VI 10 5 2 Ind A 11 VI 12 SW1 Open 3 11 VI 12 SW Ind B 13 VI 14 SW1 Close 4 13 VI 14 SW3 Ind 15 VI 16 SW1 Open 4 15 VI 16 SW3 Ind B 168 L4400 User s Guide Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver 7 Y1153A The Y1153A supports the attenuators listed below Up to two of the attenuators may be connected Agilent Attenuator Description 84904K L 11 dB max 1 dB steps 4 sections 84906K L 90 dB max 10 dB steps 4 sections 84907K L 70 dB max 10 dB steps 3 sections 84904M 11 dB max 1 dB steps 4 sections 84905M 60 dB max 10 dB steps 3 sections 8
22. Refresh All 1 Undo Properties Interactive IO EW Add Instrument 3 Add Interface Delete Task Tasks for This In Refresh Al 4n Agilent GPIB interface card installed in a PCI slot in this computer mane ERICF01 Refresh this GF ca interface a F COMI ASRL1 This item has been verified 9 ASRL2 4 GPIBO Change Properties Shange proper SA LAN TCPIPO Z change the lab L44500 Add Instrument oose the interface on which to manually add an instrument qd Ignore automatically add interfaces and instruments use Refresh x Delete Interface Name Status Description 3 COM1 ASRL1 Unavailable RS 232 serial interface General Tasks Available serial interface Refresh all Unavailable USB interface s Ww Add an instrum Interface status information More Informatia Instruments may be added to this interface 9 How do I conne HowdoIget 9 dead g OK Cancel Help Agilent VISA is the primary VISA library Figure 2 16 Adding Instruments to the GPIB Interface In the configurable properties window shown in Figure 2 17 select GPIB address 9 and click OK This is the factory default address that will be changed as necessary in the following steps New GPIB Instrument GPIB address Secondary address None Check for an instrument at this GPIB address Auto identify
23. The rear panel of an L4400 series instrument is shown in Figure 3 2 Note that the ports and connectors available are based on the instrument s options and functionality ee none uox 190 240V GPIB 8 001 KO pad J Analog Busses Abts Ge C A x Va Max LAN Reset 7 External Trigger Alarm DIO Port LAN Port Analog Bus Port GPIB Interface Power optional Figure 3 2 L4400 Instrument Rear Panel L4421A shown Analog Bus Port The Analog bus port available on the rear panel of the L4421A 40 Channel Armature Multiplexer Module and the L4433A Dual Quad 4x8 Reed Matrix Module allows signals to be routed to external instruments such as digital multimeters DMMs There are four busses ABUS1 ABUS 4 on the port Figure 3 3 defines each bus and corresponding pin numbers ABus1 LO pin 4 ABus2 LO 3 ABus3 LO pin 2 Current L4421A only ABus4 LO pin 1 2A Max ABus4 6 ABus3 7 2 8 ABus1 HI pin 9 Figure 3 3 1 4400 Analog Bus Port Pinouts See Scanning with External Instruments later in this chapter for information on how the analog bus is used for scanning a channel list with an external DMM 50 L4400 User s Guide Ch
24. 224 10 L4452A Multifunction Module with DIO D A and Totalizer L4452A Multifunction Module 236 Digital Input Output 236 Totalizer Input 236 Analog Output DAC 236 L4452A SCPI Command Summary 237 L4452A Example Program Segments L4452A Simplified Block Diagram L4452A D Sub Connector 244 34952T Terminal Block 245 L4400 User s Guide 241 243 L4451A and L4452A Calibration Procedures Calibration Procedures 248 Agilent Technologies Calibration Services 248 Calibration Interval 248 Time Required for Calibration 249 Automating Calibration Procedures 249 Recommended Test Equipment 249 Calibration Security 249 Calibration Message 252 Calibration Count 252 Calibration Process 252 Aborting a Calibration in Progress 253 Performance Verification Tests 253 L4451A and L4452A Performance Test Considerations 253 L4451A 4 Channel Isolated DAC Module 253 L4452A Multifunction Module 261 L4400 User s Guide Agilent 14400 LXI Class C Instruments User s Guide e 1 200 Introduction to the 14400 Series Instruments Instrument Considerations 2 Interconnection Solutions Overview 4 Bench Top Operation and Instrument Rack Mounting 5 Applying Power 11 Welcome The products covered in this user s guide represent the Agilent 1 4400 Series of LXI Class C instruments LXI an acronym for LAN eXtensions for Instrumentation is an instrumentation standard for devices that use the Ethernet LAN as thei
25. 44 45 mm 1 75 in 15 875 mm 6 35 mm EIA unit ae 1 EIA unit 44 45 mm 15 875 1 75 in 6 35 mm Figure 1 2 EIA Unit Indicators for Installing the Y1160A Rack Mount It is not necessary to remove the cabinet side panels to rack mount the L4400 instruments The side panels can be removed however if additional access to the cabinet s vertical columns is desired Install the Shelf Rails 1 Select the vertical position in the rack between any two adjacent EIA unit indicators where the L4400 instrument is to be installed Insert clip on nuts item 5 on the three holes between the unit indicators Place nuts on both the left and right front facing columns Figure 1 3 L4400 User s Guide 7 1 Introduction to the 14400 Series Instruments If center facing columns with holes are present on the frame insert a clip on nut on the hole perpendicular to the center hole on the front facing column See Figure 1 3 back of rack center facing colums insert clip nuts on first and third holes between indicators center of rack SS rail channel insert clip nut if column present insert clip nuts between rack unit indicators Ay front facing colums Figure 1 3 Rack Column and Shelf Rail Orientation 2 With the rail channel facing the center of the rack connect the rail to the front facing column using a
26. Alarm Limits OUTPut ALARm 1 2 SEQuence Returns sequence associated with alarm ROUTe SEQuence TRIGger SOURce lt name gt source Assigns trigger source to sequence ROUTe SEQuence TRIGger SOURce lt name gt Returns trigger source currently selected Defining a Sequence A sequence defines a series of SCPI commands with an associated name When the sequence is first defined the commands are compiled and then stored in a compressed format in non volatile memory The following SCPI commands by L4400 LXI instrument are allowed in a sequence definition all other commands will generate an error L4421A L4433A ROUTe C1OSe lt ch_list gt ROUTe CLOSe EXCLusive lt ch_list gt ROUTe OPEN G ch list ROUTe OPEN ABUS 1 4 ABUS1 ABUS4 ALL ROUTe OPEN ALL 1 ALL ROUTe MODule WAIT 1 ALL ROUTe SEQuence TRIGger IMMediate lt name gt SYSTem DELay IMMediate lt time gt ABORt L4437A ROUTe Cl1OSe G ch list ROUTe CLOSe EXCLusive G ch list ROUTe OPEN G ch list ROUTe OPEN ALL 1 ALL ROUTe MODule WAIT 1 ALL ROUTe SEQuence TRIGger IMMediate lt name gt SYSTem DELay IMMediate lt time gt ABORt 90 L4400 User s Guide 14400 User s Guide Operating and Programming L4445A ROUTe ClOSe lt ch_list gt ROUTe OPEN G ch list ROUTe MODule WAIT 1 ALL ROUTe SEQuence TRIGger IMMediate lt name gt SYSTem DELay IMMediate lt time gt ABORt
27. a close operation provides a single pulse on the specified channel If you enable verification on a non paired single drive non pulsed continuous drive channel on the L4445A the ROUTe CLOSe and ROUTe OPEN commands return the state of the verified device rather than the drive state of the specified channel It is possible to have such a channel being driven via a ROUTe CLOSe command by the channel position indicators show the channel as open In these cases use the ROUTe CHANnel VERify POSition STATe command to determine exactly which channels are currently being driven The ROUTe CHANnel VERify POLarity command sets the logic polarity of the verification lines on specific channels You can specify the polarity as NORMal active high or INVerted active low If you have not enabled verification you can still query the indicator state of a specific channel using the ROUTe CHANnel VERify POSition STATe command This command is useful for channels on which verification is disabled for activities such as debugging or when verification is disabled for performance reasons L4400 User s Guide LED Drive L4400 User s Guide Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver 7 The distribution boards contain a ribbon cable header you can use to connect LEDs to provide a visual indication of switch state These lines reflect the state of their corresponding channel s position indicator Some systems use LEDs as a graphical indicator of swit
28. using the ROUTe OPERation OVERlap ENABle command the verification will be performed at the end of each close open operation before processing the next command The state of all verified channels on a remote module is refreshed whenever any channel on that remote module is operated This helps to ensure the front panel and web based interface have a valid state 149 7 150 Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver Switch state is stored in the instrument In contrast the ROUTe OPEN and ROUTe CLOSe queries always check the actual hardware state of the switch for verified channels For paired operations on the L4445A using the ROUTe CHANnel DRIVe PAIRed MODE command when you enable verification on either paired channel verification will be enabled on both channels In addition the module checks for complementary position indicators on the lower and upper channels of the pair i e the position indicators should indicate opposite states If the state of the lower and upper position indicators are found to be in the same state due to a hardware issue an error is generated and the state of the lower channel is assumed When the paired mode is disabled and pulsed mode is enabled you cannot query the open closed state of the associated channels unless verification is enabled While in this mode single drive operation only close operations are allowed on the channels operations are not allowed In this mode
29. 10 32 flathead screw item 4 and the center clip on nut on the front facing column Repeat for the rail on the opposite column Ensure the rail channel faces the center of the rack If the rack has center facing columns Figure 1 3 insert 10 32 pan head screw through the rail opening and clip nut perpendicular to the front facing column Repeat for the rail on the opposite column 3 On the rack s rear facing columns insert clip on nuts on the first and third holes between the EIA unit indicators that are at the same vertical position as the indicators on the front facing columns 4 Attach the rear brackets to the rail ends using two 10 32 pan head screws item 3 and two 10 32 nuts with lockwashers item 6 per rail Adjust the bracket along the rail until the bracket end aligns with covers the rack s rear facing columns Tighten the 10 32 pan head screws to firmly connect the bracket to the rail and maintain the rail length Connect the rail brackets to the rear facing columns using two 10 32 pan head screws per column 14400 User s Guide 14400 User s Guide Introduction to the 14400 Series Instruments 1 Install the Sliding Shelf Facing the rack slide the shelf item 7 onto the bottom surfaces of the rail channels The tabs at the back of the shelf pass underneath the channel surface The tabs allow you to extend the shelf from the cabinet thus providing a working surface for mounting the instruments Bot
30. 10 conductor ribbon cable 0 050 pitch 26 or 3M 3801 10 26 AWG 28 AWG stranded 3M 3365 10 28 AWG Y1154A Connector 14 pin socket connector 0 1 x 0 1 pin grid 3M P N 89114 0101 AMP P N 76288 2 3M P N 89110 0101 AMP P N 76288 1 IDC termination center polarizing key Switch Connector 10 pin socket connector 0 1 x 0 1 pin grid IDC termination center polarizing key Cable Wiring Y1154A connector pin 1 to switch connector pin 1 Note pins 11 14 of 14 pin connector not used 9 Conductor Cable Item Description Example Part Numbers Cable Type 9 conductor ribbon cable 0 050 pitch 26 or 3M 3801 09 26 AWG 28 AWG stranded 3M 3365 09 28 AWG Y1154A Connector 10 pin socket connector 0 1 x 0 1 pin grid 3M P N 89110 0101 AMP P N 76288 1 3M P N 8209 6000 AMP P N 747306 4 IDC termination center polarizing key 9 pin D sub male IDC termination without threaded insert Switch Connector Cable Wiring Y1154A socket connector pin 1 to switch D sub connector pin 1 Note pin 10 of Y1154A connector not used Y1154A Switch Control All channels are operated in PAIRed mode 14400 User s Guide State A State B SW1 ROUT OPEN xx01 ROUT CLOS xx01 SW2 ROUT OPEN xx02 ROUT CLOS xx02 SW3 ROUT OPEN xx03 ROUT CLOS xx03 SWA ROUT OPEN xx04 ROUT CLOS xx04 SW5 ROUT OPEN xx05 ROUT CLOS xx05 SW6 ROUT OPEN xx06 ROUT CLOS xx06 SW7 ROUT OPEN xx07 ROUT CLOS xx07 SW8 ROUT OPEN xx08
31. 1101 TRAC DATA DIG LWOR 01101 mytrace hFFEEFFEE hBCBC9999 SOUR DIG MEM TRAC mytrace 1101 SOUR DIG MEM ENAB ON 1101 SOUR DIG MEM STAR 1101 Using an external strobe the following SCPI commands set the L4450A to have an 8 bit output using synchronous handshake with an external strobe input The number of times to output the traces is set to infinite continuous output until the memory is stopped The memory is enabled and then triggered The start stop line is set high following the first byte handshake and remains high until the last byte is output CONF DIG WIDT BYTE 1101 CONF DIG DIR OUTP 1101 CONF DIG HAND SYNC 1101 CONF DIG HAND SYNC STR SOUR EXT 01101 SOUR DIG MEM NCYC 0 1101 TRAC DATA DIG BYTE 1101 mytrace 260 139 SOUR DIG MEM TRAC mytrace 1101 SOUR DIG MEM ENAB ON 1101 SOUR DIG MEM STAR 1101 209 210 L4450A 64 Bit Digital 1 0 with Memory and Counter Buffered 1 0 Operations Each of the two banks on the L4450A has its own memory that can be used to store patterns to output traces or to store input patterns The width of the first channel in each bank controls the width of the memory operations Memory may be used as 64K x 8 bits 64K x 16 bits 32K x 32 bits Buffered Memory Output Each bank on the L4450A has its own memory for use in buffered transfers Changing a bank from an input to an output will clear all memory for that bank For buffer
32. 209 handshaking digital data L4450A 209 hardware configuration 17 hardware descriptions L4421A 106 L4433A 120 L4437A 134 L4450A 205 L4451A 224 L4452A 236 high energy sources 3 66 host names 20 21 humidity 2 humidity limits 66 identifying instruments 27 initiated measurement mode L4450A 223 installing instrument drivers 14 installing the Agilent 10 Libraries 14 instrument addressing 21 instrument command summary 55 instrument configuration 17 instrument cooling 5 instrument grounding ii Instrument overviews L4421A 102 instrument overviews L4433A 114 L4437A 130 instrument state storage 96 instrument states 96 instrument ventilation 5 instrument web interface 28 instruments identifying 27 locating 22 Interactive 10 26 interconnections 4 interrupt lines L4450A 219 IP addresses 21 IP addresses and host names 20 isolated LAN networks 17 isothermal block 110 K keywords 53 L 14400 front panel overview 48 instrument addressing 21 instrument configuration 17 instrument driver installation 15 instrument drivers 14 programming environments 16 programming examples 59 rear panel overview 50 14400 channel addressing scheme 52 L4421A connector pinouts 109 hardware description 106 simplified schematic 108 valid measurement functions 102 L4421A example program segments 105 L4421A SCPI command summary 103 14433 channel numbering 116 conn
33. 255 255 0 0 255 255 0 0 Figure 2 15 Changing the Instrument LAN Interface Configuration NOTE Selecting Help with this Page on any Web interface window provides information on the use of the current Web interface page Selecting Help with this Page on the Browser Web Control page provides a listing of the help contents LAN Configuration Command Summary In addition to using the Web interface the instrument s LAN configuration can be set changed changed programmatically Chapter 3 Table 3 3 provides a listing of the LAN configuration commands implemented by the L4400 series instruments Refer to the L4400 Programmers Reference on the Product Reference CD ROM p n 34989 13601 for detailed information on the commands 32 L4400 User s Guide Software Installation and Configuration 2 GPIB Configuration The following information assumes the GPIB interface card has been installed in your computer If necessary install the card as instructed by the documentation provided with the card The L4400 series instruments are available with an optional GPIB interface The steps required to configure L4400 instruments for use over GPIB include connecting the GPIB cables adding the instrument to the GPIB interface configuration using Agilent Connection Expert changing the instrument GPIB address systems with multiple L4400 instruments testing the IO path Each L4
34. 6 bypass 25 OFPnd45 46 R7L 40 bypass 22 C6L bypass 26 R8H 5 C2H bypass 43 C7H bypass 15 R8L 6 C2L bypass 44 C7L bypass 16 C1H 37 C3H bypass 19 C8H bypass 47 38 C3L bypass 20 C8L bypass 48 121 5 122 L4433A Dual Quad 4x8 Reed Matrix 34933T 001 Terminal Block for Two Wire Mode This terminal block with screw type connections is labeled with the model number and the abbreviated module name All modules that connect to the analog bus are interlock protected This means that when an installed module is exposed no terminal block or cable is connected the analog bus relays which are on Matrix 2 are open and disconnected from the analog buses See page 112 for further information If you are using an Agilent terminal block to connect your DUT to this module be sure to use the 34933T 001 terminal block that corresponds to the 2 wire configuration mode Note that an error will not be generated if you have installed a terminal block that doesn t match the present module configuration 14400 User s Guide L4433A Dual Quad 4x8 Reed Matrix 5 Warning the insulation of the wiring used with the terminal block must be rated for the highest voltage that will be present on the terminal block or on the analog bus Although columns are numbered the same on Matrix 1 and Matrix 2 they are electrically separate from one another e g Col C2
35. Agilent Connection Expert File Edit Vie RefreshAll v2 Undo 3 Properties Interactive 10 Add Instrument P Add Interface Delete Instrument 1 0 on this PC AN Instrument L4450A Tasks for This In 2 Refresh All AN instrument connected directly to the LAN or a Select Interactive 2 ional instrument connected via a remote 1 0 server ERICF01 Refresh this instrument COMI ASRL1 query was done 97 2 ASRL2 Change Properties LAN TCPIPO VISA address TCPIPO 192 168 1 221 instD INSTR Send command ME L4450A TCPIP0 192 168 1 221 this instrument irs Mil Agilent Interactive 10 CONNECTED TO TCPIPO 192 168 Change the lab Connect Interact Help o 2 ga Add a programi i 5 n alias Stop Device Clear ReadSTB SYST ERR ClearHistory Options Commands guration Change proper Select highlight instrument Command D Ignore Send Command Send amp Read x Delete Instrument Session History General Tasks Connected to TCPIP0 192 168 1 221 inst0 INSTR p TST lt 0 Refresh all ig Add an instrum More Informatio 3 lt m a Figure 2 11 Selecting an Instrument and Starting Interactive IO Identifying the Instruments 14400 series instruments are comprised of the carrier the instrument sub assembly and on selected instruments
36. B gt View Project Window Help p Debug Init WithOptions e Object Browser 349214 c Operating and Programming 3 change the address string as tion Explorer Mux_349214 X 11 D while 0 J840 dx3 Specify the default address define DEFAULT LOGICAL ADDRESS GPIBO 9 1INSTR E void main ViSession ViRsrc VilInt32 VilInt32 ViUInt32 char char Char viDefaultRM IyStrument Txt ddress LOGICAL ADDRESS actual functListIydex measurement Index SCPIcmd A28 replySgring 256 funerfiatr25 amp 61 Output change address string p Solution Mux 349214 1 project Eg 349214 3 References 3 Source Files False double click to view source code Figure 3 8 Changing the Instrument Address String VISA Programs Visual Basic 6 0 To modify VISA examples with Visual Basic 6 0 open the example by double clicking the example name with the vbp extension When using Visual BASIC 6 0 you are prompted to enter change the instrument s address string after starting the program The Visual Basic 6 0 form is similar to that shown in Figure 3 6 VISA COM Examples VISA COM examples are available with the Microsoft Visual Basic 6 0 environment To modify the examples double click the example name with the vbp extension L4400 User s Guide 63 3 Operating and Progra
37. Bus Relays Armature non latching ie 7 ABus2 DMM Current MEAS N scanning SE ie scanning L MIT oa ert map oos 921 922 923 924 tec L 043 p e TL t EH JL o21 COM2 o2 023 L4 024 L5 1 o2 L L 106 L4400 User s Guide L4421A TSIL represents Temperature Sensor Interface Line This line is used for temperature interface only As a safety eature interlock 1 pins 17 and 33 on Bank 1 must be shorted to enable the Bank 1 Analog Bus relays to close The optional 34921T terminal block shorts these pins for you This feature protects inadvertent routing of high voltages from the Analog Bus to the D sub connector of the module TSIL represents Temperature Sensor Interface Line This line is used for temperature interface only As safety eature interlock 2 pins 17 and 33 on Bank 2 must be shorted to enable the Bank 2 Analog Bus relays to close The optional 34921T terminal block shorts these pins for you This feature protects inadvertent routing of high voltages from the Analog Bus to the D sub connector of the module L4400 User s Guide L4421A 40 Channel Armature Multiplexer 4 Sub Connectors o Bank 1 Bank2 o Bank 1 For orientation the D sub connector end of the module is f
38. CATalog ROUTe SEQuence DEFine lt name gt lt commands gt ROUTe SEQuence DEFine lt name gt ROUTe SEQuence DELete ALL ROUTe SEQuence DELete NAME lt name gt ROUTe SEQuence RUNNing NAME ROUTe SEQuence TRIGger IMMediate lt name gt ROUTe SEQuence TRIGger SOURce lt name gt MANual ROUTe SEQuence TRIGger SOURce lt name gt ROUTe SEQuence WAIT SYSTem SYSTem RMODule RESet 1 SYSTem RMODule STATus 1 137 7 Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver L4445A Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver 138 The L4445A consists of a driver interface instrument L4445A and one or more remote modules 34945EXT The first remote module is electrically attached to the driver instrument using a provided cable equipped with 9 pin D Sub connectors The first remote module attached to the driver instrument is referred to as the master module Additional remote modules are referred to as slave modules Additional remote modules 34945EXT are connected in a daisy chain fashion using RJ 45 connectors and cables A cable is provided with each module Up to eight remote modules can be controlled by a single L4445A Each remote module is divided into four banks for switch control Each bank has a connector for a distribution board The distribution boards provide an electrical connection between the user supplied microwave switches or attenuators and the remote module A variety of distribution boards are available that pro
39. CLOSe 91301 ROUT CLOSe 91301 ROUTe CHANnel DRIVE STATe 91301 The ROUTe CHANnel DRIVE STATe query returns a O if the channel is not being driven and a 1 if the channel is being driven 189 7 Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK 190 L4400 User s Guide Agilent 14400 LXI Class C Instruments User s Guide 8 L4450A 64 Bit Digital 170 with Memory and Counter L4450A SCPI Command Summary 192 L4450A 64 Bit Digital 1 0 with Memory and Counter 199 Basic Digital 1 0 Operations 200 Handshaking 203 Buffered 1 0 Operations 210 Interrupt Lines 213 Byte Ordering 214 Pattern Matching 215 Counter 216 Clock 218 L4450A D Sub Connectors 218 34950T Terminal Block 221 RE Agilent Technologies 191 L4450A 64 Bit Digital 1 0 with Memory and Counter L4450A SCPI Command Summary 192 Table 8 1 lists the instrument specific SCPI commands that apply to the L4450A 64 Bit Digital I O and Counter instrument Table 3 3 Chapter 3 lists the SCPI commands that apply to all L4400 series instruments For complete information on all SCPI commands refer to the Programmer s Reference contained on the L4400 Product Reference CD ROM p n 34989 13601 Table 8 1 L4450A SCPI Command Summary Subsystem Commands CONFigure Counter CONFigure COUNter DCYCle lt gate_time gt IMINIMAXIDEF lt ch_list gt Totalizer CONFigure COUNter FREQuency lt gate_time gt IMINIMAXIDEF
40. Driver Y1150A Connections LED Connectors Switch Connectors OO O09 OO O00 Y1150A Switch Connectors SW1 Through SW8 Pin C 9 25000010 1000009 Use Pin Use GND 2 IND B N C 4 VI Drive B 6 IND A Drive A 8 VI VR 10 N C VR is the Voltage source for the Relay Vl is the Voltage source for the LED Indicator Distribution Board Connector No Connection To This Pin 186 Switch Connector Pint L4400 User s Guide Item Cable Type Y1150A Connector Switch Connector Cable Wiring Description 9 conductor ribbon cable 0 050 pitch 26 or 28 AWG stranded 10 pin socket connector 0 1 x 0 1 pin grid Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver IDC termination center polarizing key 9 pin D sub male IDC termination without threaded insert Y1150A socket connector pin 1 to switch D sub connector pin 1 Note pin 10 of Y1150A connector not used Example Part Numbers 3M 3801 09 26 AWG 3M 3365 09 28 AWG 3M P N 89110 0101 AMP P N 76288 1 3M P N 8209 6000 AMP P N 747306 4 26 AWG recommended for 5V coil switches Y1150A Switch Control All switches are driven in PAIRed mode L4400
41. ENABle 147 7 148 Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver Using Pulse Drive To use the pulse drive mode send the ROUTe CHANnel DRIVe PULSe MODE ON command or pair two channels with the ROUTe CHANnel DRIVe PAIRed MODE command The diagram below illustrates the pulse drive for two channels switches and the relationship of the drive parameters to the power supply requirements T Pulse B l E T Setttle lt T Recovery gt Drive Ch1 _ L C Drive 2 Start Drive Start Drive Channel 1 Position Channel 1 Channel 2 Indicators Evaluated As shown in the diagram the drive is applied to channel 1 and held for the T Pulse time set using the ROUTe CHANnel DRIVe PULSe WIDTh command Drive is applied to channel 2 only after a power supply recovery period has elapsed T Recovery The power supply recovery time is set using the ROUTe 1 DRIVe RECovery command This parameter may be set individually for each channel or will default to 0 0 ms following either a SYSTem RMODule RESet Or ROUTe RMODule BANK PRESet command If you are verifying the channel operation see page 149 you may also specify a T Settle parameter During T Settle the switch is considered busy This parameter ensures the switch has had time to change state before the verification This parameter may be set individually for each channel or will default to 0 0 ms followi
42. Installing the Instrument Firmware Once the utility is saved return to the Web page and click on Agilent Firmware Revision lt revision number gt Save the firmware file to a directory on your PC e g Temp Note the directory location as you will need to specify the path to the firmware file when you run the firmware update utility When updating from the LAN interface the update utility requires you to spec ify the instrument host name or IP address Before running the utility test the communication path to the instrument s using Agilent Connection Expert Open Agilent Connection Expert and refresh the LAN and GPIB if present interfaces by clicking Refresh All Figure 2 10 A Vina green circle next to the instrument indicates communication with the instrument on that inter face Note the host names or IP addresses assuming an update over the LAN interface of the instruments to receive firmware updates 1 From the directory where the update utility was installed start the utility by selecting FirmwareUpdateUtility exe L4400 User s Guide 14400 User s Guide Software Installation and Configuration 2 Click Next until the window shown in Figure 2 22 appears Firmware Update Utility Firmware File Selection Select a file to download File Name CATEMPagtl 44005 eries_instrument_rev9 xs Browse Firmware File Information Firmware Revision Applicable Model p Description 14400 Series
43. Item Description Cable Type 3 wire cable 24 AWG stranded Y1155A Connector Screw terminal connection for wire provided on Y1155A Switch Connector Solder wire to switch solder lug Cable Wiring Varies with drive option see switch documentation L4400 User s Guide 181 7 182 Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver Paired Operations Drive 1 Drive 2 Drive 3 Drive 4 Drive 5 Drive 6 Drive 7 Drive 8 Y1155A Switch Control ROUT OPEN xx01 ROUT OPEN xx02 ROUT OPEN xx03 ROUT OPEN xx04 ROUT OPEN xx05 ROUT OPEN xx06 ROUT OPEN xx07 ROUT OPEN xx08 Drive 11 Drive 12 Drive 13 Drive 14 Drive 15 Drive 16 Drive 17 Drive 18 ROUT CLOS xx01 ROUT CLOS xx02 ROUT CLOS xx03 ROUT CLOS xx04 ROUT CLOS xx05 ROUT CLOS xx06 ROUT CLOS xx07 ROUT CLOS xx08 PAIRed operation must be configured manually The ROUTe RMODule BANK PRESet does not configure Y1155A channels for PAT Red operations Unpaired Operations Drive 1 Drive 2 Drive 3 Drive 4 Drive 5 Drive 6 Drive 7 Drive 8 Drive 11 Drive 12 Drive 13 Drive 14 Drive 15 Drive 16 Drive 17 Drive 18 ROUT CLOS xx01 ROUT CLOS xx02 ROUT CLOS xx03 ROUT CLOS xx04 ROUT CLOS xx05 ROUT CLOS xx06 ROUT CLOS xx07 ROUT CLOS xx08 ROUT CLOS Gxx1 1 ROUT CLOS xx12 ROUT CLOS xx13 ROUT CLOS xx14 ROUT CLOS xx15 ROUT CLOS xx16 ROUT CLOS 17 ROUT CLOS xx18 L4400 User s Guide
44. L4400 series instruments are listed in Table 1 3 Refer to the instrument data sheets for a complete listing of instrument specifications The data sheets can be found on the Web at www agilent com find L4400 Table 1 3 Agilent L4400 Series Instrument Input Power Specifications Instrument Description Power Supply Universal 100V to 240V 10 L4421A L4433A Power Line Frequency 50Hz to 60Hz 10 auto sensing L4437A L4445A Power Consumption 50VA L4450A L4451A Operating Environment Full accuracy for 0 C to 55 C L4452A Full accuracy to 80 R H at 40 C Storage Environment 40 C to 70 C Connecting the Power Cord and Turning On the Instrument Connect the power cord supplied with the instrument or a power cord rated for the conditions listed in Table 1 3 to the electrical outlet and to the instrument Turn the instrument on and off by pressing the power button shown in Figure 1 6 L4400 User s Guide 11 1 Introduction to the 14400 Series Instruments Refer to Table 3 1 Chapter 3 for definitions of the LEDs ATTN LAN PWR on the L4400 instrument front panel Agilent Technologies L442 1 4o chan Armature Multiplexer LXI 9 Reset Safety Interlock Pins See Manual A 05 04 Jone Je Power Button Figure 1 6 Location of the L4400 Series Instrument Power Button 12 L4400
45. Limits 84 You can configure the list of channels for 4 wire external scanning When enabled the instrument automatically pairs channel n in Bank 1 with channel n 20 in Bank 2 to provide the source and sense connections For example make the source connections to the HI and LO terminals on channel 2 in Bank and the sense connections to the HI and LO terminals on channel 22 or 37 in Bank 2 To configure the instrument for 4 wire external scanning send the following command ROUTe CHANnel FWIRe OFF ON lt ch_list gt The following program segment configures a separate DMM and the L4421A for one pass through a scan list of 10 channels Figure 3 14 CONF RES AUTO DEF Configure DMM function resistance TRIG SOUR EXT Set DMM trigger source TRIG COUN 10 Set DMM trigger count NIT Put DMM in wait for trigger state ROUT SCAN 1001 1010 Set L4421A scan list ROUT CHAN ADV SOUR EXT Set L4421A channel advance source NIT Initiate the scan close first channel The L4400 Product Reference CD ROM p n 34989 13601 included with the L4400 instruments contains complete examples VISA VISA COM IVI COM of scanning L4421A channels using a separate DMM The example is in the folder Mux_L4421A Usage L4450A 64 Bit Digital I O digital input counter channels only L4452A Multifunction Module digital input totalizer channels only You can configure the instrument to generate an alarm w
46. MultiFunction address References _UpgradeReport htm E AssemblyInfo vb m Form vb GPIBO 9 INSTR p Agilent34980A Lo click to start program lt property of object host F True standardInitOptions 9524 1 channel 6 vfs g Solution Explo Running Doct enter address string Figure 3 6 Changing the Address String IVI COM Visual Basic NET Visual Basic 6 0 To modify IVI COM examples with Visual Basic 6 0 open the example by double clicking the example name with the vbp extension When using Visual BASIC 6 0 you are prompted to enter change the instrument s address string after starting the program The Visual Basic 6 0 form is similar to that shown in Figure 3 6 Modifying IVI C Examples IVI C examples are available for the Microsoft Visual C 6 0 environment To modify IVI C examples for use with with your instrument open the example in the MVI C subdirectory of VC 60 by double clicking the example name with the veproj extension Once the development environment opens select the example source code file cpp extension of the same name L4400 User s Guide 61 62 Operating and Programming Locate InitWithOptions and change the address string as shown in the example of Figure 3 7 29 DigMemRead Microsoft Visual C design DigMemRead cpp DAR File Edit View Project Build Debug Tools Window Help iQ M lt gt p Debug gt vista
47. OG 2C8 203 ines bypass 1C1 2C1 1R3 2R3 106 2C6 NC NC 1R1 2 2R1 GND No connect pins 11 12 17 18 31 32 34 and 45 46 NOTE Conventions for these Description Pin Description drawings and tables as they TRI 19 167 TC4 bypass 3 relate to pinout information 2R4 means Matrix 2 Row is 2 26t bypass 4 4 1R3 39 1C8 105 bypass 9 1C5 means Matrix 1 1R4 5 268 30 2C5 bypass 10 Column 5 2R1 50 1 1 bypass 21 1C6bypass 25 462 bypass means Matrix 282 28 2C1 bypass 22 2C6 bypass 26 4 ind the 2R3 40 1C2 bypass 43 1C7 bypass 15 connection bypasses the 1000 in rush resistor that eng 2 202 bypass 207 bypass 16 protects the reed relays 1C1 37 1C3 bypass 19 1108 bypass 47 2C1 38 2C3 bypass 20 2C8bypass 48 Matrices 3 and 4 3C4 4C4 bypass bypass 3C5 4 5 bypass bypass 3C7 3C4 4C4 3R4 4R4 3C5 4C5 NC 3C7 4C7 303 4C3 3C1 4C1 NC bypass bypass bypass bypass 3 2 4C2 000000000 33 403 301 401 483 306 406 bypass bypass 60 0 O60 3R2 4R2 3C8 4C8 NC NC MS CN NC NC 3R1 bypass bypass bypass bypass Interlock bypass bas Interlock OO O O 560800686 4R1 DICE As a safety feature interlock pins I7 Desc
48. ROUT CLOS xx08 177 7 178 Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver Y1154A LED Connectors LED1 and LED2 LED1 Connector Use VI VI VI VI VI VI VI VI Pin 10 12 14 16 20000002020 100000020201 SW1 SW1 SW2 SW2 SWS SWS SW4 SW4 gt U gt gt C 13 15 LED2 Connector Use Pin Use VI 2 SW5 A VI 4 SW5 VI 6 SW6 A VI 8 SW6 B VI 10 SW7 A VI 12 SW7 B VI 14 SW8 A VI 16 SW8 B L4400 User s Guide 1155 14400 User s Guide Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver 7 The Y1155A provides screw terminal connections can support the Agilent switches listed below Additionally the screw terminals make it adaptable to most any switch Agilent Switch Description 8762A B C Terminated latching 3 port SPDT 8762F 75 ohm terminated SPDT 8763A B C Terminated latching 4 port transfer 8764A B C Terminated latching 5 port Other Switches Numerous When using the Y1155A the ROUTe RMODule BANK PRESet command s default configuration see page 153 may not be suitable for the wide variety of switches and devices available You will need to manually configure the channel drive attributes to ensure safe reset operations of these switch systems 179 7 180 Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver Y1155A Switch Options Supported Recommended options are shaded Option Name Option Num
49. SENSe DIGital MEMory MATCh DATA ch list SENSe DIGital MEMory SAMPle COUNt lt count gt IMINIMAXIDEFIINFinity lt ch_list gt SENSe DIGital MEMory STARt ch list SENSe DIGital MEMory STEP ch list SENSe DIGital MEMory STOP ch list SENSe DIGital THReshold lt voltage gt IMINIMAXIDEF ch list SENSe DIGital THReshold MINIMAX 8G ch list Digital Pattern Compare SENSe DIGita MEMory COMPare ACTion CONTinuelSTARtISTOP Q ch list SENSe DIGita MEMory COMPare ACTion ch list L4400 User s Guide L4450A 64 Bit Digital 1 0 with Memory and Counter 8 SOURce Digital External Clock Output SOURce DIGital DATA BYTEI1I WORDI2ILWORdI4 data ch list SOURce DIGital DATA BYTEITIWORDI2ILWORdl4 DECimallBINaryIHEXadecimallOCTal 8 ch list SOURce DIGital DATA BIT 011 bit ch list SOURce DIGital DATA BIT bit ch list SOURce DIGital DRIVe ACTivelOCOLlector 8 ch list SOURce DIGital DRIVe ch list SOURce DIGital HANDshake LEVel lt voltage gt IMINIMAXIDEF ch list SOURce DIGital HANDshake LEVel MINIMAX 8 ch list SOURce DIGital INTerrupt ENABle OFFIOIONI1 ch list SOURce DIGital INTerrupt ENABle ch list SOURce DIGital INTerrupt MODE STARtISTOPIGATE Q ch list SOURCce DIGital INTerrupt MODE Q9 ch list SOU
50. TIME lt ch_list gt CALCulate AVERage PTPeak lt ch_list gt CALCulate SCALe GAIN gain lt ch_list gt CALCulate SCALe GAIN lt ch_list gt CALCulate SCALe OFFSet lt offset gt lt ch_list gt CALCulate SCALe OFFSet lt ch_list gt CALCulate SCALe STATe OFFIOIONI1 lt ch_list gt CALCulate SCALe STATe lt ch_list gt CALCulate SCALe UNIT lt units gt lt ch_list gt CALCulate SCALe UNIT lt ch_list gt 196 L4400 User s Guide 14400 User s Guide L4450A 64 Bit Digital 1 0 with Memory andCounter 8 ROUTe Monitor Scanning Switch Control Sequence Operation ROUTe MONitor DATA ROUTe MONitor MODE CHANnellDMM ROUTe MONitor MODE ROUTe MONitor STATe OFFIOIONI1 ROUTe MONitor STATe ROUTe MONitor CHANnel lt channel gt ROUTe MONitor CHANnel ROUTe MONitor CHANnel ENABle OFFIOIONI1 lt ch_list gt ROUTe MONitor CHANnel ENABle Q ch list ABORt INITiate ROUTe CHANnel DELay seconds IMINIMAXIDEF ch list ROUTe CHANnel DELay MINIMAX ch list ROUTe CHANnel DELay AUTO OFFIOIONI1 ch list ROUTe CHANnel DELay AUTO Q ch list ROUTe SCAN scan list ROUTe SCAN ROUTe SCAN ADD ch list ROUTe SCAN REMove Q ch list ROUTe SCAN ORDered OFFIOIONI1 ROUTe SCAN ORDered ROUTe SCAN SIZE ROUTe CHANnel LABel CLEar MODule 1 ROUTe CHANnel LABel DEFine
51. a wiring terminal block The carrier and instrument sub assembly have separate serial numbers and separate firmware revisions The commands used to query these parameters are IDN returns the carrier serial number and firmware revision SYSTem CTYPe 1 returns the instrument sub assembly serial number and firmware revision SYSTem CDEScription 1 returns the instrument description These commands can be executed from the Interactive IO window Examples of the information returned by each command are as follows L4400 User s Guide 27 2 28 Software Installation and Configuration IDN Agilent Technologies L4421A MY00012345 0 12 0 04 0 00 0 00 product carrier serial number carrier firmware revision SYST CTYP 1 Agilent Technologies L4421A MY44000237 2 16 product sub assembly serialnumber sub assembly firmware revision SYST DESC 1 64 bit Digital I O Module with Memory and Counter Using the Instrument Web Interface Each L4400 series instrument can be programmed using its Web based interface The Web interface functions as a virtual front panel which can also be used for interactive control familiarization with instrument capabilities determining changing instrument configuration troubleshooting and debugging Comprehensive on line help providing Web interface usage information is available with each Web window The instrument Web interface can be opened from Agilent Con
52. all readings are automatically time stamped If memory overflows the new readings will overwrite the first oldest readings stored the most recent readings are always preserved You can specify a trigger count in conjunction with a sweep count The two parameters operate independent of one another and the total number of readings returned will be the product of the two parameters The coNFigure and MEASure commands automatically set the scan trigger count to 1 The instrument sets the scan trigger count to 1 after a Factory Reset RST command An Instrument Preset SYSTem PRESet command or Card Reset SYSTem CPON command does not change the setting The following command sets the trigger count TRIGger COUNt To configure a continuous scan send TRIG COUNT INFINITY Sweep Count Usage L4450A 64 Bit Digital I O digital input counter channels only L4452A Multifunction Module digital input totalizer channels only The sweep count sets the number of sweeps per trigger event during a scan a sweep is one pass through the scan list Trigger Sweep 1 Sweep 2 Sweep n Trigger FSS es Sweep Count 1 to 500 000 sweeps Figure 3 11 Sweep Count Diagram The sweep count is valid only while scanning If no channels have been assigned to the scan list the specified sweep count is ignored no error is generated L4400 User s Guide Operating and Programming 3 You can specify a swee
53. are enabled on each 1 4400 series instrument shipped from Agilent This allows the instrument to automatically obtain an address on the network If there is a DHCP server on the network the server will assign the address to the instrument If there is not a DHCP server on the network the L4400 instrument will automatically determine an address to use The address will be in the range of 169 254 xxx xxx If available the instrument will try to acquire its default setting of 169 254 44 88 L4400 User s Guide Software Installation and Configuration 2 Host Names Each L4400 instrument has a default host name The format of the host name is A L44xxA yyyyy where L44xxA is replaced by the module number e g L4421A and yyyyy are the last five digits of the instrument serial number The instrument host name is reported by Agilent Connection Expert for network servers that support Dynamic Domain Name Service DNS For network servers that do not support Dynamic DNS only the IP address is reported Instrument Addressing During programming an L4400 series instrument is accessed through its address string which consists of an IP address or host name For example TCPIPO0 192 168 1 221 instO INSTR The 1 4400 series instruments can also be accessed using a host name as part of the address string For example TCPIP0 A L4450A 12345 agilent com inst0 INSTR The L4400 instruments can be restored to their default
54. by the digital modules The following command reads data from the alarm queue one alarm event is read and cleared each time this command is executed SYSTem ALARM The following command retrieves scanned readings and alarm data from reading memory the readings are not erased FETCh 87 3 Operating and Programming Using the Alarm Output Lines As mentioned there are two TTL alarm lines available on the rear panel Alarms connector Each alarm output line represents the logical OR of all channels assigned to that alarm number an alarm on any of the associated channels will pulse the line The connector is shown below Alarm 1 output 1 r Alarm 2 output pin 2 A Trig Alarms DIO Gnd pin 9 Figure 3 15 The L4400 Series Rear Panel Alarm Connector You can configure the behavior of the alarm output lines as follows The configuration that you select is used for both alarm output lines A Factory Reset RST command clears the alarm outputs but does not clear the alarm queue in either configuration Latch Mode In this mode the corresponding output line is latched true when the first alarm occurs and remains asserted until you clear it by initiating a new scan or cycling power You can manually clear the output lines at any time even during a scan and the alarm data in memory is not cleared however data is cleared when you initiate a new scan Track M
55. channel numbering and width L4450A 206 channel numbers 14433A 116 channel polarity L4450A 208 channel threshold L4450A 208 channel width L4450A 208 clock output L4450A 224 Index command parameters channel lists and scan lists 55 MIN and MAX 54 optional 53 querying 54 command separators 54 command summary all instruments 55 L4421A 103 14433 115 L4437A 132 L4445A 142 L4450A 198 L4451A 226 L4452A 237 computer configuration 21 condensation 2 configuration hardware 17 connecting GPIB cables 33 connecting LAN cables 18 connecting the power cord 11 connector Alarms 88 Ext Trig 75 connector pinouts L4421A 109 L4433A one wire mode 127 L4433A two wire mode 123 L4437A 135 L4450A 224 L4451A 232 L4452A 244 cooling 5 counter operations L4450A 222 custom channel labels 68 cycle count 98 D DAC output adjustment L4452A 262 DAC output verification test L4452A 262 default and reset states L4445A 158 default settings instrument 45 LAN 45 delay channel 77 deleting traces from memory L4450A 218 digital 1 0 L4452A 236 Digital 1 0 operations L4450A 206 265 Index distribution board 150A L4445A 161 51A L4445A 165 52A LA445A 170 53A LA445A 175 154A L4445A 180 155A L4445A 185 distribution boards L4445A 160 downloading firmware updates 39 drivers recommended 16 D sub pinouts L4421A 109 L4433A two wire m
56. channels in the range must be valid Any invalid channels within the range are ignored no error is generated The Analog Bus relays numbered 911 912 913 etc on the multiplexer and matrix modules are ignored if they are included in a range of channels An error will be generated if an Analog Bus relay is specified as the first or last channel in a range of channels Refer to Scanning later in this chapter for additional information creating using a scan list L4400 SCPI Command Summary Table 3 3 lists the SCPI commands that apply to all L4400 series instruments The SCPI commands unique to each instrument are summarized in the instrument specific chapters that follow Chapter 3 For complete information on all commands refer to the Programmer s Reference contained on the L4400 Product Reference CD ROM L4400 User s Guide 55 3 56 Operating and Programming Table 3 3 14400 Series SCPI Command Summary Subsystem Commands STATus CLS ESE lt enable_value gt ESE ESR SRE lt enable_value gt SRE STB STATus MODule ENABle lt enable_value gt STATus MODule ENABle STATus MODule EVENt STATus MODule SLOT1 CONDition STATus MODule SLOT1 ENABle lt enable_value gt STATus MODule SLOT1 ENABle STATus MODule SLOT1 EVENt STATus OPERation CONDition STATus OPERation ENABle lt enable_value gt STATus OPERation ENABle STATus OPERation EVENt STATus PRESet STATus QUEStionable COND
57. configurations by pressing the Reset pin on the instrument s front or rear panels Computer Configuration Most computers used for instrument system control are configured for LAN and Internet access Before starting Agilent Connection Expert to locate and configure the instruments verify that your computer is able to connect to the network that will include the instruments A Web browser is used to open web interfaces to the L4400 instruments See Using the Instrument Web Interface In some network configurations a proxy server cannot be used to access the instrument IP addresses In these situations the browser must be set to disable the proxy for the instrument s address Configuring the LAN Interface 14400 User s Guide With the L4400 instrument s turned on and connected to a private or site LAN network start Agilent Connection Expert utility by clicking on the Agilent IO Control icon and selecting Agilent Connection Expert from the pop up menu Figure 2 5 21 2 Software Installation and Configuration The procedure for using Agilent Connection Expert to locate and configure L4400 instruments is independent of the type of network you are using private or site and the network devices present switches or routers For more information on Interactive IO refer to the Agilent IO Libraries Suite Getting Started Guide The guide is available on line by clicking on the Agilent 10 Control icon and then selectin
58. in more detail beginning on page 210 For buffered input operations the HO line acts as a start stop line This line will be set high when the memory input command is executed and will return low when the memory input operation has completed The line is not used and is set to high impedance An external strobe input on the H2 line controls the pace of memory transfers The sending device must ensure the data is valid before the Tgpryp and stays valid until after Tgorp Tggrup is 30 ns and Tgorp is 55 ns A synchronous buffered input using an external clock is shown in the diagram below default handshake line polarity 0 Start Stop 50ns Toyere gt 100 ns Last Cycle i H2 Strobe In SETUP Trou Tuotp Valid X Don t Care For example the following SCPI commands set the L4450A to have an 8 bit input using synchronous handshake with an external strobe input The number of bytes to read into memory is set to infinite continuous reading into memory until the memory is stopped The memory is enabled and then triggered The start stop line is set high following the first byte handshake and remains high until the last byte is captured CONF DIG WIDT BYTE 01101 CONF DIG DIR INP 01101 CONF DIG HAND SYNC 01101 SENS DIG MEM SAMP COUN 0 1101 SENS DIG MEM ENAB ON 1101 SENS DIG MEM STAR 1101 14400 User s Guide 207 208 H1 Strobe Out
59. jumper on the L4437A allows you to define the power failure states for the instrument s 5 A latching relays Depending on the position of the jumper the 5 A relays will either open or maintain state when system power failure occurs When shipped from the factory the power fail jumper is in MAINTAIN position all relays maintain their present state when power fails WARNING Before changing the position of the jumper turn off the instrument and remove all external connections Wait five to ten seconds to allow the instrument s internal capacitors to discharge Remove the L4437A instrument sub assembly from the instrument carrier and then remove the sheet metal cover from the sub assembly Move the position of the jumper mounted on the sub assembly See the figure below for the jumper s location 14400 User s Guide L4437A General Purpose Switch 6 WARNING Do not connect the L4437A directly to a mains power outlet If it is necessary to switch a mains voltage or any circuit where a large inductive load may be switched you must add signal conditioning elements to reduce the potential transients before they reach the instrument open 5 2 maintain 3 5 5Amp relays Power Down State Figure 6 1 5A Relay Power Down State Jumper 14400 User s Guide 129 6 L4437A General Purpose Switch L4437A SCPI Command Summary 130 Table 6 1 lists the instrument specific SCPI commands that apply to the
60. lt ch_list gt CONFigure COUNter PERiod lt gate_time gt IMINIMAXIDEF lt ch_list gt CONFigure COUNter PWIDth lt gate_time gt IMINIMAXIDEF lt ch_list gt CONFigure COUNter TOTalize READIRRESet lt ch_list gt CONFigure TOTalize READIRRESet lt ch_list gt Digital 1 0 CONFigure DlGital BYTEI1IWORDI2ILWORdI4 lt voltage gt INOR MallINVerted lt ch_list gt CONMFigure DIGital DIRection INPutlOIOUTPutl1 lt ch_list gt CONFigure DIGital DIRection lt ch_list gt CONFigure DIGital HANDshake SYNChronous thresh voltage lt level_voltage gt lt polarity gt lt ch_list gt CONFigure DIGital HANDshake CTIMe lt seconds gt IMINIMAXIDEF lt ch_list gt CONFigure DIGital HANDshake CTIMe MINIMAX lt ch_list gt CONFigure DIGital HANDshake DRIVe ACTivelOCOLlector lt ch_list gt CONFigure DIGital HANDshake DRIVe lt ch_list gt CONFigure DIGital HANDshake POLarity NORMalllNVerted HOIOIH 111 IH2I2ZIALL lt ch_list gt CONFigure DIGital HANDshake POLarity 2 2 lt ch_list gt CONFigure DIGital HANDshake RATE lt frequency gt IMINIMAXIDEF lt ch_list gt CONFigure DlIGital HANDshake RATE MINIMAX 8 ch list CONFigure DIGital HANDshake STATe HIMPedancelOFFION lt ch_list gt CONFigure DlIGital HANDshake STATe lt ch_list gt CONFigure DIGital HANDshake SYNChronous STRobe SOUR
61. lt label gt ch list ROUTe CHANnel LABel DEFine USERIFACTory ch list ROUTe SEQuence CATalog ROUTe SEQuence DEFine lt name gt lt commands gt ROUTe SEQuence DEFine lt name gt ROUTe SEQuence DELete ALL ROUTe SEQuence DELete NAME lt name gt ROUTe SEQuence DONE ROUTe SEQuence TRIGger IMMediate lt name gt ROUTe SEQuence TRIGger SOURce lt name gt ALARm1IALARm2IMANual ROUTe SEQuence TRIGger SOURce lt name gt ROUTe SEQuence WAIT OUTPut Alarm Limit OUTPut ALARm 112 CLEar OUTPut ALARm CLEar ALL OUTPut ALARm MODE LATChITRACk OUTPut ALARm MODE OUTPut ALARm 112 SEQuence OUTPut ALARm SLOPe NEGativelPOSitive OUTPut ALARm SLOPe OUTPut ALARm 112 SOURce lt ch_list gt OUTPut ALARm 112 SOURce 197 198 L4450A 64 Bit Digital 1 0 with Memory and Counter FORMat Scanning FORMat BORDer NORMallSWAPped FORMat BORDer FORMat READing ALARm OFFIOIONI1 FORMat READing ALARm FORMat READing CHANnel OFFIOIONI1 FORMat READing CHANnel FORMat READing TIME OFFIOIONI1 FORMat READing TIME FORMat READing TIME TYPE ABSolutelRELative FORMat READing TIME TYPE FORMat READing UNIT OFFIOIONI1 FORMat READing UNIT READ SWEep Scanning SWEep COUNt lt count gt IMINIMAXIDEF SWEep COUNt MINIMAX TRIGger Scanning TRG INITiate READ lt ch_list gt TRIGger COUNt lt count gt IMINIMAXIDEFIINFinity TRIGger COUNt
62. lt string gt CALibration STRing Calibration Count You can query the L4451A and 14452 to determine how many calibrations have been performed Note that your instrument was calibrated before it left the factory When you receive your instrument be sure to read the count to determine its initial value The calibration count increments up to a maximum of 232 after which it rolls over to 0 Since the value increments by one for each calibration point a complete calibration may increase the value by many counts Calibration Count Command CALibration COUNt L4400 User s Guide 251 14451 and L4452A Calibration Procedures Calibration Process The following general procedure is the recommended method to complete a full instrument calibration 1 See L4451A and L4452A Performance Test Considerations 2 Perform the verification tests to characterize the instrument incoming data 3 Unsecure the instrument for calibration Calibration Security on page 250 4 Perform the DAC adjustment procedures on either the L4451A or L4452A 5 Secure the instrument against unauthorized calibration 6 Note the security code and calibration count in the instrument s maintenance records Aborting a Calibration in Progress Sometimes it may be necessary to abort a calibration after the procedure has been initiated You can abort a calibration at any time by turning off the power You can also abort the calibr
63. operations are extended to the non scanned banks as well If the ABusl relay used for current measurements channel 931 on L4421A only is not closed prior to the initiation of the scan the four current channels channels 41 through 44 are not affected by the scan However if the 1 relay is closed the instrument will open the 1 relay as well as the four associated current channels in a make before break fashion When you add a digital read digital modules to a scan list the corresponding channel is dedicated to the scan The instrument issues a Card Reset to make that channel an input channel the other channel is not affected While the scan is running you can perform low level control operations on any channels on the digital modules that are not in the scan For example you can output a DAC voltage or write to a digital channel even if the totalizer is part of the scan list However you cannot change any parameters that affect the scan channel configuration scan interval Card Reset etc while a scan is running L4400 User s Guide Operating and Programming 3 If a scan includes a read of the totalizer the count is reset each time it is read during the scan only when the totalizer reset mode is enabled At the end of the scan the last channel that was scanned will be opened as well as any Analog Bus relays used during the scan Any channels that were opened during the scan will remain open at
64. output drive level of 2 5 V and normal polarity Other parameters such as the handshake timing are set to default values refer to the Programmer s Reference Help file on the L4400 Product Reference CD ROM for details CONF DIG HAND SYNC 2 5 2 5 NORM 1201 You can set parameters by using a sequence of commands instead of the CONFigure macro command For example the following command sequence sets the handshaking mode to synchronous the output drive to open collector and the handshake rate to 1 MHz CONF DIG HAND MODE SYNC 1101 CONF DIG HAND DRIV OCOL 1101 CONF DIG HAND RATE 1000000 1101 Setting the Handshake Line Parameters You can set the handshake lines input threshold output drive mode and output drive voltage These settings affect all the handshake lines in the bank Handshake line polarity can be set for each individual handshake line For example you can invert the polarity of the handshake line H1 on bank 2 with the following command CONF DIG HAND POL INV H1 01201 You can set the output drive mode output voltage and input threshold for all handshake lines in each bank For example the following commands set the drive mode to active the drive voltage to 4 5 V and the input threshold to 1 0 V on bank 2 CONF DIG HAND DRIV ACT 1201 SOUR DIG HAND LEV 4 5 1201 SENS DIG HAND THR 1 1202 The settings for drive mode output drive level and input threshold also apply to the ba
65. relays for 4 wire measurements the ABus2 SENS relays are used in addition to the ABusl relays When the scan is initiated the instrument will open all channels in banks that contain one or more channels in the scan list In order to guarantee that no signals are connected to the Analog Buses prior to the scan the instrument will open all ABus1 relays applies to all banks in all slots In banks that contain channels in the scan list the instrument will also open all ABus2 relays regardless of whether 4 wire measurements are involved If no channels configured for 4 wire measurements are included in the scan list the state of the ABus2 relays in the non scanned banks is not altered The state of the ABus3 and ABus4 relays is not altered and these relays remain available for use during the scan However be sure to use CAUTION when closing these relays on banks involved in the scan While the scan is running any signals present on ABus3 and or ABus4 will be joined with the scanned measurement on 1 and ABus2 While the scan is running the instrument prevents use of all channels in banks that contain one or more channels in the specified scan list these channels are dedicated to the scan In addition the instrument prevents use of all ABusl and ABus2 relays on banks containing channels in the scan list If one or more channels configured for 4 wire measurements are included in the scan list then the rules for ABus2 relay
66. the CD ROM drive If another vendor s implementation of VISA Virtual Instrument Software Architecture is currently installed on your computer continue installation of the Agilent IO Libraries by installing Agilent VISA in side by side mode More information on side by side operation can be found in the Agilent IO Libraries Suite Help available after installation is complete under Using Agilent VISA with Another Vendor s VISA Installing the Agilent IO Libraries also installs the Interchangeable Virtual Instrument IVI Shared Components The IVI Shared Components are required before IVI drivers e g IVI COM IVI C can be installed see Installing the L4400 Instrument Drivers After the IO libraries have been successfully installed you will see the Agilent IO Con trol IO icon in the taskbar notification area of your computer screen Figure 2 1 IO a Ds mo sm Figure 2 1 Agilent IO Control Icon Installing the L4400 Instrument Drivers Insert the L4400 Product Reference CD ROM into the computer The installation pro gram will open the menu window shown in Figure 2 2 If the program does not start automatically select Start gt Run gt Open cd rom drive gt index html L4400 User s Guide 15 2 16 Software Installation and Configuration 3 Agilent L4400 Product Reference CD ROM Microsoft Internet Explorer BAR File Edit View Favorites Tools ae o x
67. the command string A vertical bar separates multiple parameter choices for a given command string Brackets Triangle brackets gt indicate that you must specify a value for the enclosed parameter For example the syntax statement shows the seconds parameter enclosed in triangle brackets The brackets are not sent with the command string You must specify a value for the parameter Optional Parameters Some parameters are enclosed in square brackets This indicates that the parameter is optional and can be omitted The brackets are not sent with the command string If you do not specify a value for an optional parameter the instrument chooses a default value 53 3 54 Operating and Programming Command Separators colon is used to separate a command keyword from a lower level key word A blank space separates the keyword from the first parameter If a command has more than one parameter the subsequent parameters are sep arated by commas as shown below ROUT CHAN DRIV PULS WIDTh 0 010 1201 1202 Linking Commands A semicolon is used to separate IEEE 448 2 common commands and commands at the same node within the same subsystem For example RST CLS IDN Also sending the following command string COUN GAT POL NORM 1301 SOUR EXT 01301 is the same as sending the following two commands SENSe COUNter GATe POLarity NORM 1301 SENSe COUNter GATe SOUR
68. the first 20 alarms are saved Even if the alarm queue is full the alarm status is still stored in reading memory during a scan The alarm queue is cleared by the CLS clear status command when power is cycled and by reading all of the entries A Factory Reset RST command or instrument preset SYSTem PREset does not clear the alarm queue You can assign an alarm to any configured channel and multiple channels can be assigned to the same alarm number However you cannot assign alarms on a specific channel to more than one alarm number When an alarm occurs the instrument stores relevant information about the alarm in the queue This includes the reading that caused the alarm the time of day and date of the alarm and the channel number on which the alarm occurred The information stored in the alarm queue is always in absolute time format and is not affected by the FORMat READing TIME TYPE command setting You must configure the channel before setting any alarm limits If you change the measurement configuration alarms are turned off and the limit values are cleared If you plan to use scaling on a channel which will also use Mx B scaling L4450A counter function be sure to configure the scaling values first If you attempt to assign the alarm limits first the instrument will turn off alarms and clear the limit values when you enable scaling on that channel If you specify a custom measurement label with scaling it is automa
69. the instrument power cord LAN cable and GPIB cable if present 6 For instruments that have accompanying terminal blocks partially remove the instrument sub assembly from the instrument carrier by loosening the spring loaded mounting screws Figure 1 5 Remove the support sleeve from the terminal block Locate and remove the flat head screws from the sleeve and remove the pan head screw from between the instrument s D sub connectors Figure 1 5 Connect the sleeve to the instrument using the flat head and pan head screws as shown Reconnect the sub assembly spring loaded mounting screws 99 head screw A instrument sub assembly flat head sawe S terminal block support sleeve flat head screws Figure 1 5 Connecting the Terminal Block Support Sleeve Refer to Chapters 4 10 for information on Terminal Block wiring and connecting the terminal block to the instrument 14400 User s Guide Introduction to the 14400 Series Instruments 1 Connect the Shelf to the Rack Frame Once the instruments are installed and all power cords and cables are routed as intended slide the shelf into the cabinet until the shelf handles meet the front facing columns of the rack frame Using two10 32 pan head dress screws item 2 per column secure the shelf to the frame Applying Power The input power operating environment and storage environment specifications for the
70. the sequence follow the overlapping rules If the command overlap function is disabled all commands within the sequence are processed in a serial fashion in the exact order in which they are received Note however that within a single command containing a ch list parameter e g ROUT CLOSE 1001 1010 the order of the individual switch operations is not guaranteed The following command defines a sequence named 5 1 which closes several channels on the instrument and then opens a single channel ROUT SEQ DEF MYSEO 1 ROUT CLOS 01001 1009 1001 L4400 User s Guide Operating and Programming 3 Querying the Sequence Definition Once you have defined a sequence you can query the definition to review what SCPI commands have been assigned The exact text specified in the original sequence definition is not preserved when the sequence is compressed stored in memory Therefore the string returned may not be identical to the original string but it will be functionally equivalent If the specified sequence name is not currently stored in memory an error is generated The query command always returns the short form of the command header in all upper case letters e g ROUT CLOS is returned instead of ROUTE CLOSE Channel numbers and channel range specifiers are returned as they were specified The following command returns a string containing the SCPI commands assigned to the specified sequenc
71. the trace from 1 to 255 times the output is controlled by the handshake Load the trace s into memory Named traces are downloaded using the TRACe DATA DIGital command The channel width used should match the width of the channel set in step 1 If you change the width of a bank all traces in memory are cleared The trace names must start with a character and may be up to 12 characters in length The trace name used must be unique to the bank Up to 32 traces may be downloaded Traces can be added or deleted only when memory is disabled Memory output cannot be enabled unless the bank has a trace assigned to it For example the following commands load two traces into memory for bank 1 In this example each byte of the LWORd to output is sent as a separate byte TRAC DATA DIG LWOR 01101 MyTracel 255 200 128 0 TRAC DATA DIG LWOR 01101 MyTrace2 254 192 64 32 You can also send trace data in IEEE 488 block format using this command The L4450A also has two special built in traces for your use You can generate and download a count up trace and a walking 175 pattern using the TRACe DATA DIGital FUNCtion command See the Programmer s Reference Help file on the L4400 Product Reference CD ROM for more details You can generate a count down or walking zero pattern by inverting the data line polarity Set which trace to use The SOURce DIGital MEMory TRACe command assigns the desired trace to the bank This command allows you to
72. this instrument Figure 2 17 Specifying the GPIB Address when Adding an Instrument L4400 User s Guide 14400 User s Guide Software Installation and Configuration 2 Verifying the GPIB Path In the Agilent Connection Expert window select and open Interactive IO Verify communication to the instrument by sending the IDN command using Send amp Read below the command line f Agilent Interactive 10 CONNECTED TO GPIBO 9 INSTR Connect Interact Help Al 101 aj E Device Clear ReadSTB SYST ERR ClearHistory Options Command v Commands Send Command Send amp Read Instrument Session History Connected to GPIBO 9 INSTR gt IDN lt Agilent Technologies L44504 MY00012345 0 12 0 04 0 00 0 00 Figure 2 18 GPIB Communication Using the Default GPIB Address The GPIB Address String When programming the L4400 instruments over GPIB the instrument s GPIB address is included in the address string For example GPIBO 9 INSTR Changing the GPIB Address If you have only one L4400 instrument on the GPIB interface and there are no other instruments on the bus the L4400 instrument address can remain set to 9 If you have multiple L4400 instruments or there is another GPIB instrument at address 9 then one of the addresses must be changed The command used to set the GPIB address on all L4400 instruments is SYSTem COMMunication GPIB ADDRess address The command can be abbr
73. to an alarm will remove any other sequence s association with that alarm as well as that alarm s association to any other sequence You can assign multiple channels to either of the two available alarms numbered 1 and 2 You cannot however assign alarms on a specific channel to more than one alarm number The sequence will execute once when an alarm occurs after which the trigger source will be automatically set to MANual The sequence will not execute again until the trigger source has been reassigned the alarm has been cleared the association of the sequence to the alarm has been re established and the alarm condition exists again To assign the sequence to a specific alarm number use the following command Specify the MANual parameter to remove an association without reassigning it to another alarm ROUTe SEQuence TRIGger SOURce lt name gt ALARm1 ALARm2 MANual 14400 User s Guide Operating and Programming 3 The following program segment selects the alarm source and configures the instrument L4450A to execute the sequence named TOTAL_1 when an alarm count of 50 is reported on Alarm 1 The Monitor mode is used to evaluate alarm conditions on the selected channel ROUT SEQ DEF TOTAL 1 SYST DEL 1000 CALC LIM UPP 10 25 1301 CALC LIM UPP STAT ON 1301 OUTP ALARM1 SOUR 1301 ROUT MON CHAN 1301 ROUT MON CHAN ENAB ON 1301 ROUT SEQ TRIG SOUR TOTAL 1 ALAR1 ROUT MON STAT ON INIT Del
74. triggers the internal gate timer The gate source is set using the SENSe COUNter SOURce command The default gate source is INTernal The gate is the aperture over which the signal data is gathered When the gate is internal the measurement begins as soon as the INITiate command is received Since the measurements are all derived from the same basic measurement you can retrieve the measured frequency period duty cycle and pulse width from the same initiated and gated measurement For example the following commands set the counter to measure the input signal for 1 ms using the internal gate The frequency period duty cycle and pulse width are returned as floating point numbers 14400 User s Guide 217 218 L4450A 64 Bit Digital 1 0 with Memory and Counter Clock CONF COUN FREQ 1 3 01301 SENS COUN INIT 1301 SENS COUN FREQ 01301 SENS COUN PER 1301 SENS COUN 01301 SENS COUN DCYC 1301 CONFigure COUNter FREQuency command parameter sets the internal gate time to le 3 or 1 ms in the above example You can also set the gate time using the SENSe COUNter GATE TIME command The general purpose clock output is derived from the internal time base The output clock is divided down from the time base clock such that Clock Output Hz time base frequency divisor The time base frequency is 40 MHz The divisor can be an integer from 2 to 49 providing a range of 20 MHz to 10
75. us 9 ERICF01 Refresh this instrument COMI ASRLI 97 ASRL2 S9 Change proper 144504 GPIBQ Send command m LAN TCPIPO this instrument 9 usen LE GPIB Instrument L4450A Changethelab Highlight instrument and 2 select change address to Add a programi d alias 40 GPIB address pe Secondary address None Ignore Check For an instrument at this GPIB address Delete Auto identify this instrument Refresh m Add an instrum More Informatio 8 amm G s mamas 6 Agilent VISA is the primary VISA library Figure 2 20 Changing the GPIB Address within Configuration Expert Verifying the new GPIB Path To verify the GPIB address change you can close the Interactive IO window select the instrument and reopen Interactive IO Or with Interactive IO remaining open select Connect and change the address from 9 to 10 Once connected to GPIB address 14400 User s Guide 37 2 Software Installation and Configuration 10 you can send the IDN command and verify the response from the instrument Agilent Interactive IO CONNECTED TO GPIB 8 Interact Help Connect Disconnect Clear ReadSTB SYST ERR Exit Send Command Send Instrument Session History Cannery Co
76. 0 series Product Reference CD ROM part number 34989 13601 contains progamming examples to familiarize you with the operation of selected L4400 instruments Once communication paths to the instruments have been set Chapter 2 the examples can be used as an introduction to the sequence of commands necessary to program the functions available with the instruments The examples on the CD ROM include multiple development environments and demonstrate instrument programming via drivers and direct programming through the I O libraries The drivers and I O libraries used include IVI C VISA VISA COM To install the examples on your computer insert the Product Reference CD ROM and click Install next to L4400 Programming Examples Follow the instructions as prompted Once installed the examples are located in the following default path and are grouped into development environment directories C Program Files Agilent L4400 Examples To select a specific example open the environment directory under Examples followed by the driver IVI COM or IO library VISA VISA COM subdirectory The examples assume that you are familiar with the programming languages demonstrated and the tools associated with the development environment Note that before you run a programming example the program must be edited to include the address string of your particular instrument The following sections provide inst
77. 00000 Switch Connector Pin1 No Connection To This Pin evi 166 L4400 User s Guide 16 Conductor Cable Item Cable Type Y1152A Connector Switch Connector Cable Wiring Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver 7 Description 16 conductor ribbon cable 0 050 pitch 26 or 28 AWG stranded 10 pin socket connector 0 1 x 0 1 pin grid IDC termination center polarizing key 16 pin socket connector 0 1 x 0 1 pin grid IDC termination center polarizing key Y1152A connector 1 to switch connector 1 Example Part Numbers 3M 3801 16 26 AWG 3M 3365 16 28 AWG 3M P N 89116 0101 AMP P N 76288 3 3M P N 89116 0101 AMP P N 76288 3 9 Conductor Cable Item Cable Type Y1150A Connector Switch Connector Description 9 conductor ribbon cable 0 050 pitch 26 or 28 AWG stranded 10 pin socket connector 0 1 x 0 1 pin grid IDC termination center polarizing key 9 pin D sub male IDC termination without threaded insert Example Part Numbers 3M 3801 09 26 AWG 3M 3365 09 28 AWG 3M P N 89110 0101 AMP P N 76288 1 3M P N 8209 6000 AMP P N 747306 4 Cable Wiring Y1152A socket connector pin 1 to switch D sub connector pin 1 Note pin 10 of Y1152A connector not used Y1152A Switch Control All channels are driven in PAIRed mode SW1 Path1 SW1 Path2 SW1 Path3 SW1 Path4 SW1 Path5 SW1 SW2 SW3
78. 08 channel threshold 208 channel width 208 clock output 224 connector pinouts 224 counter operations 222 deleting traces from memory 218 external pullups 208 frequency measurements 223 handshake line drive mode 210 handshake line output voltage level 210 handshake line polarity 210 L4400 User s Guide handshake line threshold 210 handshaking 209 handshaking digital data 209 initiated measurement mode 223 interrupt lines 219 memory operations 216 pattern matching 221 reading digital data 206 synchronous handshake mode 211 totalizer mode 222 writing digital data 207 L4450A digital 1 0 operations 206 L4450A hardware description 205 L4450A SCPI command summary 198 L4451A analog output adjustments 257 analog output verification test 255 calibration count 252 calibration interval 248 calibration message 252 calibration procedure 253 calibration security 249 calibration time 249 connector pinouts 232 example programs 228 overload fuse 224 performance verification 254 remote sensing 224 security code 249 sense terminals 224 simplified block diagrams 231 L4451A hardware description 224 L4451A SCPI command summary 226 L4452A analog output 236 calibration count 252 calibration interval 248 calibration message 252 calibration procedure 261 calibration security 249 calibration time 249 connector pinouts 244 DAC output adjustment 262 DAC output verifi
79. 1002 OUTPut STATe ON 1001 1002 SOURe FUNCtion ENABle ON 1001 1002 Example Downloading trace points to memory and outputting waveform from DACs The following command segment downloads seven trace points to memory and output the waveform from DAC channels 1 and 2 The trace name is NEG RAMP TRACe DATA 1 NEG RAMP 1 67 33 0 33 67 1 SOURce FUNCtion TRACe NEG RAMP 1001 1002 OUTPut STATe ON 1001 1002 SOURe FUNCtion ENABle 91001 1002 Example Setting the amplitude of a waveform for offset and gain The following commands set the offset to 5 25 and the gain to 1 5 on DAC channels 1 and 2 SOURce FUNCtion VOLTage OFFSet 5 25 1001 1002 SOURce FUNCtion VOLTage GAIN 1 5 1001 1002 Example Setting cycle count for a waveform following command segments turn off the trace output mode on DAC channels 1 and 2 set the cycle count to 100 then turn the trace output mode back on SOURCe FUNCtion ENABle OFF 1001 1002 SOURce FUNCtion TRACe NCYCles 100 1001 1002 SOURce 1 1 ON 91001 1002 Example Deleting a waveform following command deletes the trace named TEST_WFORM from the instrument TRACe DELete 1 TEST WFORM L4400 User s Guide 229 9 L4451A 4 Channel Isolated D A Converter with Waveform Memory External Clock Example Selecting an external clock source and setting a clock divisor The first command selects the external clock source o
80. 101 Atten 1 P101 Thru Line 1 P101 Atten 2 P101 Thru Line 2 P101 Atten 3 P101 Thru Line 3 P101 Atten 4 P101 Thru Line 4 Pin C 13 15 LED2 Connector Use Pin VI 2 VI 4 VI 6 VI 8 VI 10 VI 12 VI 14 VI 16 Use P102 Atten 1 P102 Thru Line 1 P102 Atten 2 P102 Thru Line 2 P102 Atten 3 P102 Thru Line 3 P102 Atten 4 P102 Thru Line 4 L4400 User s Guide 173 7 Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver Y1154A The Y1154A supports one of the transfer switches listed below and up to six N181x switches Agilent Switch Description 87222C D E 4 port transfer switch N1810UL Unterminated latching 3 port SPDT N1810TL Terminated latching 3 port SPDT N1811TL Terminated latching 4 port transfer N1812UL Unterminated latching 5 port Y1154A Switch Options Supported Recommended options are shaded Option Name Option Number Description and Comments Frequency Range letter suffix in All options supported model number Coil Voltage STD no options 24VDC nominal 20VDC to 32VDC allowed DC Connector Type STD 10 pin ribbon cable header 100 Solder lugs Can use ribbon cables with the Y1154A or discrete wires with the Y1155A Mounting Bracket 201 All options supported Calibration Certificate UK6 All options supported Drive Options STD Direct coil connections for open collector drive and TTL 5V CMOS compatible inputs standard 174 L4400 User s Guide Microwave Switch A
81. 14 31 c 31 21 2 5 GND 73 GND 15 GND 35 GND 54 11 2 74 2 e 2 5 GND 17 GND GND 56 10 76 1 18 29 38 19 57 GND 77 GND 19 GND 39 GND 58 9 78 0 20 28 59 GND 220 L4400 User s Guide L4450A 64 Bit Digital 1 0 with Memory and Counter 8 34950T Terminal Block The optional 34950T terminal block has screw type connections and the terminal are labeled with the channel and bit information 123 4 5 6 0 12 3 4 5 DIO CH101 COUNTER DIO CH201 COUNTER DIO CH102 CH301 DIO CH202 CH302 9 1011 12 13 14 15 ATEH 10 11 12 13 14 15 GATEH 5 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 INTR amp 16 17 18 DIO CH105 D DIO CH104 HANDSHAKE D 25 26 27 28 29 30 51 HO H H2 24 25 26 gt 9 20 21 22 23 INTR 1 0 0 HANDSHAKE 2 7 28 29 30 51 HO H1 H2 L4450A Terminal Block L4400 User s Guide 221 8 14450 64 Bit Digital 1 0 with Memory and Counter THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK 222 L4400 User s Guide Agilent 14400 Class Instruments User s Guide e ee 9 200 L4451A 4 Channel Isolated D A e Converter with Waveform Memory L4451A 4
82. 400 series instrument is shipped from the factory with a default GPIB address of 9 Because instruments on the GPIB bus must have unique addresses the 1 4400 instruments must be turned on one at a time and the GPIB address changed before the next instrument is turned on and added to the configuration Connecting the GPIB Cables GPIB cables can be connected in star all cables connect directly to the computer or linear instrument to instrument configuration For systems with multiple 1 4400 series instruments turn on only 1 4400 instrument at this time If there is another instrument on the bus at GPIB address 9 i e 34980A turn off that instrument until the address of the current 1 4400 instrument is changed Starting Agilent Connection Expert Start Agilent Connection Expert by clicking the Agilent Control icon and selecting Agilent Connection Expert from the pop up menu Figure 2 5 The computer interfaces configured during installation of the Agilent IO libraries are displayed in the left column Explorer pane including the GPIB interface if a GPIB card is installed in your computer L4400 User s Guide 33 2 34 Software Installation and Configuration Adding Instruments to the GPIB Configuration Highlight the GPIB interface GPIBO and select Add Instrument on the tool bar Select the GPIB interface in the Add Instrument window and click OK Agilent Connection Expert
83. 4908M 65 dB max 5 dB steps 4 sections 8494G H 11 dB max 1 dB steps 4 sections 8495G H 70 dB max 10 dB steps 3 sections 8496G H 110 dB max 10 dB steps 4 sections Y1153A Attenuator Options Supported Recommended options are shaded 84904 5 6 7 8 Option Name Option Number Description and Comments Frequency Range letter suffix in All options supported model number RF Connectors various All options supported Coil Voltage 011 5VDC 015 15VDC 024 24VDC required if using internal power DC Connector Type STD 10 pin ribbon cable header Calibration Certificate UK6 All options supported L4400 User s Guide 169 7 170 Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver 8494 5 6 Option Name Option Number Description and Comments Frequency Range letter suffix in All options supported model number RF connectors various All options supported Coil Voltage STD 24VDC DC connector type STD 12 pin Viking connector includes 5 foot cable with Viking connector on one end no terminations on other end 016 Flat Pack ribbon cable connected to attenuator with 14 pin DIP header on free end Not recommended Calibration certificate UK6 All options supported Y1153A Connections LED Connectors OO OOO OO OLN o o o OOOO OOOO o o o SC So 84904 5 8 Attenuator Ribbon Connectors OOO OO 84904 5 8
84. 4H bypass 3 C8H bypass 47 R4L 6 C4L bypass 4 C8L bypass 48 Matrix 2 NOTE C4L bypass bypass R8L C C3H NC bypass bypass bypass bypass 2 C3H C3L C1L R7H R7L C2L bypass bypass C5L C6H ius cee NC NC NC C7H C7L 222 R6L C8H C8L NC NC 2 9 O 00 0 Bad RSH RSL C7H C7L bypass bypass Interlock Interlock 6 0600000090909 G 50 Pin D Sub Male Connector As a safety feature interlock pins 17 and 33 must be shorted to enable the analog bus relays which are on Matrix 2 to close The optional 34933T 001 for 2 wire terminal block shorts these pins for you This feature protects inadvertent routing of high voltages from the analog bus to the D sub connector of the module L4400 User s Guide In this diagram and the table below R represents row and C represents column Bypass means to bypass the 1000 in rush resistor that protects the reed relays Description Description Description R5H 49 C7H bypass 3 Interlock 17 R5L 50 C7L CAL bypass 4 Interlock 33 R6H 2 C8H bypass 9 Connect pins R6L 28 C8L 30 10 11 12 18 31 32 34 R7H 39 bypass 21
85. 61000 4 5 1995 0 5 kV line line 1 kV line ground IEC 61000 4 6 1996 EN 61000 4 6 1996 3 V 0 15 80 MHz 1 cycle 10096 IEC 61000 4 11 1994 EN 61000 4 11 1994 Interrupt 10 ms 20 ms Canada ICES 001 1998 Australia New Zealand AS NZS 2064 1 Safety IEC 61010 1 2001 EN 61010 1 2001 Canada CSA 22 2 No 61010 1 2004 USA UL 61010 1 2004 Supplementary Information This DoC applies to above listed products placed on the EU market after 1 May 2006 Date Ray Corson Product Regulations Program Manager For further information please contact your local Agilent Technologies sales office agent or distributor or Agilent Technologies Deutschland GmbH Herrenberger 130 D 71034 B blingen Germany Template A5971 5302 2 Rev B 00 L4421A DoC A DoC Revision A Contents 1 Introduction to the L4400 Series Instruments Instrument Considerations 2 Environmental Operating Conditions 2 Electrical Operating Conditions 3 Interconnection Solutions Overview 4 Bench Top Operation and Instrument Rack Mounting 5 Bench Top Operation 5 Rack Mounting 5 Procedure 6 Applying Power 11 Connecting the Power Cord and Turning On the Instrument 11 2 Software Installation and Configuration Installing the Agilent IO Libraries and L4400 Instrument Drivers 14 Installing the Agilent IO Libraries 14 Installing the L4400 Instrument Drivers 15 Configuring the 14400 Instruments 17 Selecting a LAN Network 17 Connecti
86. 7406B switches Many other switches use this technique both with and without the position indicator 34945EXT Y1155A Switch Distribution Board Logic Gate Sense Pull Down Resistor Open Collector Output Driver z N To DRV 7 DRV 2 through 6 L4400 User s Guide 14400 User s Guide Paired Drive With Separate Position Indicators Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver 7 The simplified schematic below illustrates the connection for a dual drive switch with separate position indicators The position indicators for this type of switch are independent relay contacts that are mechanically linked to the RF switch position The RF paths are not shown in the simplified diagram The coils are driven in open collector mode The position indicator is set so that a high level indicates an active switch The logic level of the position indicator can be inverted using the ROUTe CHANnel VERify POLarity command As shown Channel 01 was pulsed to close Coil A The corresponding position indicator also closed Closing position indicator A opens position indicator B The schematic shown is similar to the Agilent N181x series of switches 34945EXT Logic Gate Sense Y1155A Distribution Board IND 11 Switch Pull Down Resistor Open Collector Output Drivers
87. 9 59 59 hours 359 999 seconds with 1 ms resolution Once you have initiated the scan the instrument will continue scanning until you stop it or until the trigger count is reached See Trigger Count on page 75 for more information 72 L4400 User s Guide 14400 User s Guide Operating and Programming 3 Mx B scaling and alarm limits L4450A L4452A are applied to measurements during a scan and all data is stored in volatile memory The CONFigure and MEASure commands L4450A L4452A automatically set the scan interval to immediate 0 seconds and the scan count to 1 sweep The instrument sets the scan interval to immediate 0 seconds after a Factory Reset RST command Instrument Preset SYSTem PRESet command or Card Reset SYSTem CPON command does not change the setting The following program segment configures the instrument for an interval scan TRIG SOURCE TIMER Select interval time mode TRIG TIMER 5 Set the scan interval to 5 seconds TRIG COUNT 2 Sweep the scan list 2 t mes INIT Initiate the scam Note To stop scan send the ABORt command Manual Scanning In this configuration the instrument waits for a command before sweeping through the scan list readings from the scan are stored in volatile memory Readings accumulate in memory until the scan is terminated until the trigger count is reached or until you abort the scan You can specify a trigger count which sets the numb
88. 9 C9 09 9 9 69 69 60 69 69 9 9 9 69 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 6 9 9 9 9 C9 G9 9 G9 9 9 9 2 P1 Bank 1 Connector Pin Assignments Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 GND c gt GND 40 18 60 8 CH102 2 CNTR 22 27 41 GND 61 GND 3 GND 0 23 GND 1 42 17 C 62 NC 4 GATE oda 26 43 GND 63 GND 5 GND 25 GND 44 16 64 7 6 INTR 26 25 45 GND 65 GND 7 GND 27 GND 46 15 66 6 8 H2 28 24 47 GND 67 GND 9 GND 29 GND 48 14 68 5 H 10 H1 30 23 49 GND 69 GND 11 GND 31 GND fso 13 u 4 1 12 32 22 A 51 GND 71 GND 13 GND 33 GND 52 12 2 m 3 14 31 34 21 53 GND 73 GND 15 GND GND 54 11 74 2 16 30 T 36 20 55 GND 75 GND 17 GND 37 GND 56 10 76 1 18 29 38 19 57 GND 77 GND 19 GND 39 GND 58 9 78 0 20 28 59 GND 14400 User s Guide 219 8 L4450A 64 Bit Digital 1 0 with Memory and Counter P2 Bank 2 Connector Pin Assignments Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 GND c n GND 40 18 60 8 CH202 2 CNTR 22 27 41 GND 61 GND 3 GND 0 23 GND C 42 17 C 62 CLK 4 GATE 26 43 GND i 63 GND 5 GND 25 GND 44 16 64 7 6 INTR 26 25 45 GND 65 GND 7 GND 27 GND 46 15 66 6 8 H2 28 24 47 GND 67 GND 9 GND 29 GND 48 14 68 5 H 10 H1 30 23 49 GND 69 GND GND 31 GND 50 13 70 4 1 12 32 22 51 GND 71 GND 13 GND 33 GND 52 12 22 3
89. A COM Programs Using L4400 Instruments in Agilent 34980A Applications The L4400 series LXI instruments have counterparts that are available as plug in modules for the Agilent 34980A Multifunction Switch Measure Unit Table 3 4 lists the 1 4400 series instruments and the corresponding 34980A products Table 3 4 Agilent L4400 Series and 34980A Module Cross Reference L4400A Instrument 34980A Plug In Module L4421A 40 Channel Armature Multiplexer 34921A L4433A Dual Quad 4x8 Reed Matrix 34933A L4437A General Purpose Switch 34937A L4445A Microwave Switch Attenuator 34945A L4450A 64 Bit Digital I O 34950A L4451A 4 Channel Isolated D A Converter 34951A L4452A Multifunction Module 34952A 64 14400 User s Guide Operating and Programming 3 Because of the similarity in products code and applications can be leveraged and ported between an L4400 instrument and its 34980A module counterpart Porting Applications The programming examples on the L4400 Product Reference CD ROM as well as all application programs contain a function that opens a session to and initializes the instrument In addition to specifying the instrument s address string this initialization function contains parmeters that query and reset the instrument when the session is opened These parameters are represented by true false conditions that either perform an ID query or reset true or do not false By setting t
90. ATA lt ch_list gt SENSe TOTalize SLOPe NEGativelPOSitive lt ch_list gt SENSe TOTalize SLOPe lt ch_list gt SENSe TOTalize THReshold MODE ACITTL lt ch_list gt SENSe TOTalize THReshold MODE lt ch_list gt SENSe TOTalize TYPE READIRRESet lt ch_list gt SENSe TOTalize TYPE lt ch_list gt Digital SENSe DIGital MEMory COMPare ACTion CONTinuelSTARtISTOP Pattern lt ch_list gt Compare SENSe DIGital MEMory COMPare ACTion lt ch_list gt L4400 User s Guide 231 10 14452 Multifunction Module with DIO D A and Totalizer 238 SOURce Digital I O DAC SOURce DIGital DATA BYTEI1 WORDI2ILWORdI4 data lt ch_list gt SOURce DIGital DATA BYTEI1IWORDI2ILWORdl4 DECimallBINaryIHEXadecimallOCTal 8 ch list SOURce DIGital DATA BIT 011 bit ch list SOURce DlGital DATA BIT bit ch list SOURce VOLTage LEVel lt voltage gt IMINIMAXIDEF ch list SOURce VOLTage LEVel MINIMAX ch list CALCulate Digital Pattern Compare Alarm Limit Measurement Statistics CALCulate COMPare DATA BYTEI IWORDI2ILWORdI4 data ch list CALCulate COMPare DATA Q ch list CALCulate COMPare MASK BYTEI1IWORDI2ILWORdI4 data ch list CALCulate COMPare MASK ch list CALCulate COMPare STATe OFFIOIONI1 G ch list CALCulate COMPare S
91. AV command in this case the ordered mode will be enabled and the scan list will be empty when the instrument state is restored RCL command The scan order setting is stored in volatile memory and the ordered mode will be enabled when power is turned off or after a Factory Reset RST command The command used to control the order of the scan list is ROUTe SCAN ORDered OFF ON Monitor Mode Usage L4450A 64 Bit Digital I O digital input counter channels only L4452A Multifunction Module digital input totalizer channels only In the Monitor mode the instrument takes readings as often as it can on a single channel or during a scan This feature is useful for troubleshooting your system before a test or for watching an important signal Any channel that can be read by a device can be monitored This includes the digital input totalizer and the counter channels Readings acquired during a Monitor are not stored in memory However all readings from a scan in progress at the same time are stored in memory The Monitor mode is equivalent to making continuous measurements on a single channel with an infinite scan count Only one channel can be monitored at a time but you can change the channel being monitored at any time A scan in progress always has priority over the Monitor function Channels do not have to be part of an active scan list to be monitored however the channel must be configured for a measureme
92. Agilent 14400 Series Class Instruments User s Guide RE Agilent Technologies Notices Agilent Technologies Inc 2006 No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form or by any means including electronic storage and retrieval or transla tion into a foreign language without prior agreement and written consent from Agi lent Technologies Inc as governed by United States and international copyright laws Manual Part Number 34989 90000 Edition First Edition May 2006 Printed in Malaysia Agilent Technologies Inc 815 14th Street SW Loveland CO 80537 USA Warranty The material contained in this docu ment is provided as is and is sub ject to being changed without notice in future editions Further to the max imum extent permitted by applicable law Agilent disclaims all warranties either express or implied with regard to this manual and any information contained herein including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a par ticular purpose Agilent shall not be liable for errors or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing use or perfor mance of this document or of any information contained herein Should Agilent and the user have a separate written agreement with warranty terms covering the material in this document that conflict with these terms the warranty terms in the sep arate agreement shall control T
93. Agilent Technologies MICZIS SES I Welcome to your Web Enabled L4450A LXI Module Information about this Web Enabled Instrument L4450A LXI Module Serial Number MY00012345 Description Agilent L4450A MY0001 2345 IP Address 192 168 1 221 VISA TCPIP Connect String TCPIPO 192 168 1 221 INSTR Turn On Front Panel Identification Indicator Advanced information Figure 2 13 L4450A Web Interface Welcome Page NOTE Instruments on the network can be physically identified by selecting Turn on Front Panel Identification Indicator within the Web interface This causes the instrument s front panel LAN LED to flash continually until Turn off Front Panel Identification Indicator is selected Editing the Instrument s LAN Settings Once a communication path to the instrument has been opened the instrument s LAN configuration can be viewed and modified using the Web interface 30 L4400 User s Guide Software Installation and Configuration 2 On the Web welcome page click View and Modify Configuration This opens the configuration window shown in Figure 2 14 a Agilent L4450A MY0001 2345 Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit Favorites Tools Help x x 2 He Favores a Address http 192 168 1 221 Agilent Technologies 10 277 SAM 10772705 Parameter DHCP Automatic IP IP Address Subnet Mask Defa
94. B 24 STD STD Y1151A 6 port matrix 16 pin Ribbon direct coil for Cable Header open drain 87204A B C 24V STD STD Y1152A 16 pin Ribbon direct coil for Cable Header open drain 87206A B C 24 STD STD Y1152A SP6T 16 pin Ribbon direct coil for Cable Header open drain 87606B 24V STD STD Y1152A 3 3 2 4 or1 x 5 matrix 16 pin Ribbon direct coil for Cable Header open drain 84904K L M Option 024 STD Y1153A 84906K L M 24 10 Ribbon 849807K L M Cable Header Step Attenuators 8494G H Option 024 STD Y1153A 8495G H 24 12 pin Viking 8496G H Connector Step Attenuators 87222C D E 24V STD STD Y1154A Coaxial Transfer Switches 10 pin Ribbon direct coil for Cable Header open drain and TTL compatible 8762A B C F Option 024 Solder Lugs STD Y1155A 8763A B C 24V direct coil for 8764A B C open drain 141 14400 User s Guide 7 142 Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver Power Supplies The switches and attenuators on the master remote module can be powered from the L4445A or use an external power supply All additional slave modules must use an external power supply Each remote module has a terminal strip used to connect external switch power The three most common power supply voltages used by the microwave switches and attenuators are 5 Volts 15 Volts 24 Volts most common Power Consumption Each 34945EXT can drive up to 2A continuously using an external power supply The actual amount of power available for
95. Channel Isolated D A Converter with Waveform Memory 224 L4451A SCPI Command Summary 226 L4451A Example Program Segments 228 L4451A Simplified Block Diagrams 231 L4451A D Sub Connector Pinout 232 34951T Terminal Block 233 Ee Agilent Technologies 223 9 L4451A 4 Channel Isolated D A Converter with Waveform Memory L4451A 4 Channel Isolated D A Converter with Waveform Memory 224 The L4451A 4 Ch Isolated D A module DAC module has four independent isolated DAC channels that output DC voltage up to 16V or DC current up to 20 mA Since the DACs are electrically isolated you can stack or combine multiple DACs to have up to 64 V on a module You can control each channel manually or use the onboard memory to store multiple sequenced points Level Output Mode The module can generate voltages between 16 V DC and 16 V DC at 500 uV resolution on any channel Each channel configured for voltage output has hardware remote sensing capability to ensure that an accurate voltage is present at the load With the remote sensing feature the DAC channel outputs an additional voltage to compensate for the voltage drop in the test leads Thus using the sense connections the load voltage equals the programmed voltage as long as the resistance in each sense lead is less than 2 5Q and the maximum voltage drop in the output leads is 0 5 volts To ensure that an accurate voltage is present at the loads it is recommended that you use remote sensin
96. Control ROUTe CHANnel DRIVe CLOSe DEFault lt ch_list gt ROUTe CHANnel DRIVe CLOSe DEFault lt ch_list gt ROUTe CHANnel DRIVe OPEN DEFault lt ch_list gt ROUTe CHANnel DRIVe OPEN DEFault lt ch_list gt ROUTe CHANnel DRIVe PAIRed MODE OFFIOIONI1 lt ch_list gt ROUTe CHANnel DRIVe PAIRed MODE lt ch_list gt ROUTe CHANnel DRIVe PULSe MODE OF FIOIONI1 lt ch_list gt ROUTe CHANnel DRIVe PULSe MODE ch list ROUTe CHANnel DRIVe PULSe WIDTh lt seconds gt IMINIMAXIDEF lt ch_list gt ROUTe CHANnel DRIVe PULSe WIDTh MINIMAX lt ch_list gt ROUTe CHANnel DRIVe STATe lt ch_list gt ROUTe CHANnel DRIVe TIME RECovery lt seconds gt IMINIMAXIDEF lt ch_list gt ROUTe CHANnel DRIVe TIME RECovery MINIMAX ch list ROUTe CHANnel DRIVe TIME SETTIe lt seconds gt IMINIMAXIDEF ch list ROUTe CHANnel DRIVe TIME SETTIe MINIMAX ch list ROUTe CHANnel LABel CLEar MODule 1 ROUTe CHANnel LABel DEFine lt label gt ch list ROUTe CHANnel LABel DEFine lt type gt ch list ROUTe CHANnel VERify ENABle OFFIOIONI1 ch list ROUTe CHANnel VERify ENABle ch list ROUTe CHANnel VERify POLarity NORMallINVerted ch list ROUTe CHANnel VERify POLarity ch list ROUTe CHANnel VERify POSition STATe lt list ROUTe CLOSe Q ch list ROUTe CLOSe ch list ROUTe MODule B
97. D Bit13 22 i 48 GND Bit14 23 i 49 GND Bit15 25 i 50 GND 244 L4400 User s Guide L4452A Multifunction Module with DIO D A Totalizer 10 34952T Terminal Block Each terminal block is labeled with the model number and the abbreviated module name The 34952T provides space for breadboard and for a connector to control an external Opto 22 standard board Breadboard ooooooooeeee eeeeeeoeooee c CH3 112 34 5 6 7 16 17118 19 20 21122 23 00000000000000 9909909009990900 90 9909909009990900 90 00000000000000 9 10 11112 13114 15 24 25 26 27 28 29430 3l CH2 CH4 leeoeeeeeoo00 1 00 2 1 T DeL 2 TOTAL IZER CHE Ci CHS H7 1 00 00000000000000000000008 0999000000000 0000000000000 Breadboard Space and wiring provided for user supplied Opto 22 connector L4452A Terminal Block 14400 User s Guide 245 10 14452 Multifunction Module with DIO D A and Totalizer THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK 246 14400 User s Guide E e e e Appendix s L4451A and L4452A Calibration Calibration Procedures 248 Agilent Technologies Calibration Services 248 Calibration Interval 248 Time Required for Calibration 249 Automating Calibration Pro
98. H L 4 AW Q ANN e ANN 2 4 ANN H Q 4 ANN 2 1 ANN 2 ANN Q 4 i 4 ANN L4400 User s Guide L4433A D Sub Connectors for Two Wire Mode L4433A Dual Quad 4x8 Reed Matrix 5 o Matrix 1 Matrix2 For orientation the D sub connector end of the module is facing you Matrix 1 CH C4L bypass bypass R4L C5H CSL NC C7H C7L bypass bypass NC O O CIH C6H N NC GND NC bypass bypass bypass bypass C2H C3H R3L C2L bypass bypass C6H i o en NC NC 0 0 O e e O CaL Si bypass RIL 00000909 9090000020 50 Pin D Sub Male Connector NOTE Inthis diagram and the table below R represents row and C represents column Bypass means to bypass the 1000 in rush resistor that protects the reed relays Description Description C1H 37 7 bypass 21 bypass 9 GND RIL 50 C1L bypass 22 C5L bypass 10 No Connect pins R2H 27 C2H bypass 43 C6Hbypass 25 11 12 17 18 31 32 R2L 28 C2L bypass 44 26 94 and 45 46 R3H 39 C3H bypass 19 C7H bypass 15 R3L 40 C3L bypass 20 C7L bypass 16 R4H 5 C
99. Hz for the clock output The valid values for the clock output rate are 20 MHz 13 33 MHz 10 MHz 8 MHz 6 667 MHz 10Hz The clock output frequency will round to the nearest achievable frequency The commands used to control the clock output are SOUR MOD CLOC FREQ lt freq gt MIN MAX DEF lt slot gt SOUR MOD CLOC OFF ON 0 1 lt slot gt You can obtain the rounded value of the currently set clock frequency using the following query SOUR MOD CLOC FREQ You can also set the logic high voltage level for external clock output For example the following command sets the output clock level to 4 5 V SOUR MOD CLOC LEV 4 5 1 L4450A D Sub Connectors The L4450A uses two D sub 78 pin female connectors Each connector provides contains one bank of the module As viewed from the rear panel the connectors and their banks are shown below e D 1 1 2 2 L4400 User s Guide L4450A 64 Bit Digital 1 0 with Memory and Counter 8 As viewed from the rear panel the pins in each connector are numbered as shown below O OODMAOHDOODDOODODOOOOOO G 69 G 9 69
100. IMMediate SYSTem TIME lt hh gt lt mm gt lt ss sss gt SYSTem TIME SYSTem VERSion 14400 User s Guide 57 3 Operating and Programming SYSTem SYSTem COMMunicate LAN AUTOip OFFIOIONI1 LAN Configuration SYSTem COMMunicate LAN AUTOip SYSTem COMMunicate LAN BSTatus SYSTem COMMunicate LAN CONTrol SYSTem COMMunicate LAN DHCP OFFIOIONI1 SYSTem COMMunicate LAN DHCP SYSTem COMMunicate LAN DNS lt address gt SYSTem COMMunicate LAN DNS SYSTem COMMunicate LAN DOMain lt name gt SYSTem COMMunicate LAN DOMain CURRentISTATic SYSTem COMMunicate LAN GATEway address SYSTem COMMunicate LAN GATEway CURRentISTATic SYSTem COMMunicate LAN HISTory CLEar SYSTem COMMunicate LAN HISTory SYSTem COMMunicate LAN HOSTname lt name gt SYSTem COMMunicate LAN HOSTname CURRentlSTATic SYSTem COMMunicate LAN IPADdress lt address gt SYSTem COMMunicate LAN IPADdress CURRentlSTATic SYSTem COMMunicate LAN KEEPalive seconds IMINIMAX SYSTem COMMunicate LAN KEEPalive MINIMAX SYSTem COMMunicate LAN MAC SYSTem COMMunicate LAN SMASk lt mask gt SYSTem COMMunicate LAN SMASk CURRentISTATic SYSTem COMMunicate LAN TELNet PROMpt lt string gt SYSTem COMMunicate LAN TELNet PROMpt SYSTem COMMunicate LAN TELNet WMESsage lt string gt SYSTem COMMunicate LAN TELNet WMESsage 58 14400 User s Guide Operating and Programming 3 L4400 Series Programming Examples The L440
101. INIMAX 8 ch list SOURce FUNCtion HALT Q ch list SOURce FUNCtion SAMPle PERiod lt period gt IMINIMAXIDEF ch list SOURce FUNCtion SAMPle PERiod MINIMAX 8 ch list SOURce FUNCtion TRACe NCYCles lt count gt IMINIMAXIDEFIINFinity lt ch_list gt SOURce FUNCtion TRACe NCYCles MINIMAX lt ch_list gt SOURce FUNCtion TRACe SINDex point lt ch_list gt SOURce FUNCtion TRACe SINDex lt ch_list gt SOURce FUNCtion TRACe NAME name lt ch_list gt SOURce FUNCtion TRACe NAME lt ch_list gt SOURce FUNCtion TRIGger IMMediate lt ch_list gt SOURce FUNCtion VOLTage GAIN lt gain gt IMINIMAXIDEF lt ch_list gt SOURce FUNCtion VOLTage GAIN MINIMAX lt ch_list gt SOURce FUNCtion VOLTage OFFSet lt offset gt IMINIMAXIDEF lt ch_list gt SOURce FUNCtion VOLTage OFFSet MINIMAX lt ch_list gt External SOURce MODule CLOCk FREQuency lt frequency gt IMINIMAXIDEF 1 Clock Output SOURce MODule CLOCk FREQuency MINIMAX 1 SOURce MODule CLOCK LEVel lt voltage gt IMINIMAXIDEF 1 SOURce MODule CLOCk LEVel MINIMAX 11 SOURce MODule CLOCk STATe OFFIOIONI1 1 SOURce MODule CLOCk STATe 1 OUTPut OUTPut STATe OFFIOIONI1 lt ch_list gt DAC OUTPut STATe lt ch_list gt Configuration TRACe TRACe CATalog lt channel gt 1 Trace TRACe DELete ALL lt channel gt I1 Waveform TRACe DELete NAME 8 channel I1 l
102. IP0 192 168 1 221 instO INSTR Test Connection The instrument was successfully opened Identify Instrument Agilent Technologies L4450A MY00012345 0 12 0 04 Both the address check and the IDN query were done Auto identify this instrument Instrument Web Interface Figure 2 9 Verifying a Communication Path to the Instrument The LAN Instrument window identifies the instrument s host name its IP address its VISA address and product number Because the network server used in this example does not support Dynamic DNS the host name is not reg istered for use by the server Thus the instrument is accessed by its IP address Click on Test Connection or Identify Instrument to test the communication path to the instrument Click on OK to add the configured instrument to your network Repeat the sequence of Figures 2 7 through 2 9 for each instrument As instru ments are added they appear in the Agilent Connection Expert Explorer pane as shown in Figure 2 10 Selecting the instrument in the Explorer pane dis plays its properties in the Properties pane L4400 User s Guide 25 2 26 Software Installation and Configuration Agilent Connection Expert File Edit View Configuration Tools Help Reftesh All v 3 Undo Properties IWJ Interactive IO BW Add Instrument W Add Interface Delete Task Guide Refresh this instrument Change proper Send command this instrument Change t
103. Instrument located on the Connection Expert tool bar From the Add Instrument window select the LAN TCPIPO interface and click on OK See Figure 2 7 Agilent Connection Expert Configuration Tools Help Refresh All v Undo Properties ij Interactive 10 M Add Instrument W Add Interface 7 4 Instrument I O on this PC Refresh a meP 99 ASRL1 97 COM2 ASRL2 K GPIBO Interface Name Status Description S4 LAN TCPIPO COMI ASRL1 Available 5 232 serial interface USBO COM2 ASRL2 Available 95 232 serial interface GPIBO Available 82350 PCI GPIB interface LAN TCPIPO Available LAN interface Unavailable USB interFace s AN Interface LAN Add Instrument Interface status information Instruments may be added to this interface Figure 2 7 Agilent Connection Expert Add Instrument Window 14400 User s Guide 23 2 2 Software Installation and Configuration Clicking on Find Instruments Figure 2 8 opens the search window Clicking on Find Now performs the search for instruments on the LAN network Instruments found discovered on the network local subnet are indicated as shown In the Figure 2 8 example two instruments were located on the router subnet Agilent Connection Expert LAN Instrument TCPIPO hostname net com instO IN X add Instrument Add Interface Delete hostname net com or Instruments on
104. L4437A General Purpose Switch Instrument Table 3 3 Chapter 3 lists the SCPI commands that apply to all L4400 series instruments For complete information on all SCPI commands refer to the Programmer s Reference contained on the L4400 Product Reference CD ROM p n 34989 13601 Table 6 1 L4437A SCPI Command Summary Subsystem Commands ROUTe Switch Control ROUTe CHANnel LABel CLEar MODule 1 ROUTe CHANnel LABel DEFine lt label gt lt ch_list gt ROUTe CHANnel LABel DEFine USERIFACTory lt ch_list gt ROUTe CLOSe lt ch_list gt ROUTe CLOSe lt ch_list gt ROUTe CLOSe EXCLusive lt ch_list gt ROUTe MODule BUSY 1 ROUTe MODule WAIT 1 ROUTe MODule WAIT 1 ROUTe OPEN Q ch list ROUTe OPEN ch list ROUTe OPEN ALL 1 ROUTe OPERation OVERIap ENABle OFFIOIONI1 ROUTe OPERation OVERIap ENABle ROUTe Sequence Operation ROUTe SEQuence ABORt ROUTe SEQuence BUSY ROUTe SEQuence CATalog ROUTe SEQuence DEFine lt name gt lt commands gt ROUTe SEQuence DEFine lt name gt ROUTe SEQuence DELete ALL ROUTe SEQuence DELete NAME lt name gt ROUTe SEQuence RUNNing NAME ROUTe SEQuence TRIGger MMediate lt name gt ROUTe SEQuence TRIGger SOURce lt name gt MANual ROUTe SEQuence TRIGger SOURce lt name gt ROUTe SEQuence WAIT DIAGnostic DIAGnostic RELay CYCLes Q ch list DIAGnostic RELay CYCLes CLEar Q ch list SYSTem
105. L4450A SENSe TOTalize CLEar IMMediate G ch list SOURce DIGital DATA BYTE 1 WORD 2 LWORd 4 data lt ch_list gt SOURce DIGital DATA BIT 0 1 bit G ch list ROUTe SEQuence TRIGger IMMediate name SYSTem DELay IMMediate lt time gt ABORt L4451A SOURce CURRent LEVel lt current gt MIN MAX DEF Ge ch list SOURce VOLTage LEVel lt voltage gt MIN MAX DEF e ch list OUTPut STATe OFF O ON 1 G ch list ROUTe SEQuence TRIGger IMMediate lt name gt SOURCe FUNCtion TRIGger IMMediate G ch list SYSTem DELay IMMediate lt time gt ABORt L4452A SENSe TOTalize CLEar IMMediate G ch list SOURce DIGital DATA BYTE 1 WORD 2 LWORd 4 data lt ch_list gt SOURce DIGital DATA BIT 0 1 bit lt ch_list gt SOURce VOLTage LEVel lt voltage gt MIN MAX DEF lt ch_list gt ROUTe SEQuence TRIGger IMMediate lt name gt SYSTem DELay IMMediate lt time gt ABORt 91 3 3 92 Operating and Programming When a sequence is defined the specified commands are checked for proper syntax and absolute parameter range limits If an error is detected during compilation the entire sequence will be discarded More extensive error checking such as channel range expansion and validation is performed when the sequence is executed If you define a sequence with a name already in use by another sequence the new definition will o
106. LOS xx18 L4400 User s Guide C 13 15 Y1151A LED Connectors LED1 and LED2 LED1 Connector Use VI VI VI VI VI VI VI VI Pin 2 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver 7 2 Q OOO O 6 199909099090015 NN Use Path 1 Path 2 Path 3 Path 4 Path 5 Path 6 Not Used Not Used Pin N A C 13 15 LED2 Connector Use Pin Use VI 2 SW2 Path 1 VI 4 SW2 Path 2 VI 6 SW2 Path 3 VI 8 SW2 Path 4 VI 10 SW2 Path 5 VI 12 SW2 Path 6 VI 14 Not Used VI 16 Not Used L4400 User s Guide 163 7 Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver Y1152A The Y1152A supports one of the 87xxx switches and up to two of the Agilent N181x switches Supported switches are shown below Agilent Switch 87204A B C 87206A B C 87606B N1810UL N1810TL N1811TL N1812UL Description SP4T 4 port latching SPOT 6 port latching 6 port matrix Unterminated latching 3 port SPDT Terminated latching 3 port SPDT Terminated latching 4 port transfer Unterminated latching 5 port Y1152A Switch Options Supported Recommended options are shaded Option Name Frequency Range Coil Voltage DC Connector Type Calibration certificate Drive Options Option Number Description and Comments letter suffix in model All options supported number STD no options 24VDC nominal 20VDC to 32VDC allow
107. LXI Module Firmware Fi Figure 2 22 Firmware Update Utility Firmware File Selection 2 Using the Browse button specify the path to the firmware file and then click Next The Applicable Model window lists the L4400 series instruments which are updateable by the current firmware xs image The window is NOTused to select the instrument receiving the firmware update Firmware updates are performed on one instrument at a time Once the firmware update is complete you must exit and re start the utility to update each instrument 41 2 Software Installation and Configuration 3 Select the I O interface to be used to upgrade the instrument firmware and then select Next Figure 2 23 Firmware Update Utility Communication Method Please Select One Local Area Network GPIB After selecting the communication method click the next button below lt Back Cancel Help Figure 2 23 Selecting the Instrument Interface 4 If the LAN interface is selected Figure 2 23 enter the instrument host name or IP address and click Update If the GPIB interface is used select the instrument s GPIB address 42 L4400 User s Guide Software Installation and Configuration 2 The firmware update process takes several minutes The instrument s front panel ATTN indicator will flash green while the update is in progress Firmware Update Utility Instrument Detection and Update Co
108. MPer AMP5 1 Example Querying the system for module identify The following command returns the identify of the instrument SYSTem CTYPe 1 Reading Cycle Count and Resetting Modules to Power On State Example Reading the cycle count fora relay The following command returns the relay cycle count on channel 7 and channel 16 DIAGnostic RELay CYCLes 91007 1016 131 L4437A General Purpose Switch Example Clearing the cycle count for a relay all switch modules The following command resets the relay cycle count on channels 7 and 16 DIAGnostic RELay CYCLes CLEar 91007 1016 Example Resetting the Instrument to its power on state The following command resets the instrument to its power on state SYSTem CPON 1 L4437A 32 Channel General Purpose Switch Hardware Description The L4437A general purpose switch provides independent control of Twenty eight Form C DPST latching relays rated at 1 A Four Form SPST latching relays rated at 5 A You can set the power failure state for these 5 A relays See page 128 and page 129 A temperature sensor on these modules triggers system interrupts when high carry current induced heat on the modules reaches a threshold of 70 C L4437A Simplified Schematic Channel 001 1A Form C Channel 029 Form A tus Channel 032 1A Form C 5A Form A 132 14400 User s Guide L4437A General Purpose Switch 6 L4437A D Sub Connectors Bank 1 Bank 2
109. Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver 7 Mounting the Remote Modules The figure below shows the dimensions of the remote module and the locations of usable mounting holes 38 35 205 54 9 114 1 57 05 All Mounting Holes are Metric M4X0 7 Threads 11 34 9 73 11 73 15 05 a 1 41 74 L E Ca 114 1 84 l l 8 o gt 26 6 30 96 280 64 14400 User s Guide 187 7 188 L4445A Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver SCPI Programming Examples These programming examples provide you with SCPI command examples to use for driving the microwave switch modules The channel addressing scheme used in these examples follow the form Ircc where r is the remote module number 1 through 8 and cc is the two digit channel number For more information about channel numbering refer to Channel Numbering on page 143 For complete information on SCPI commands see th
110. RACe POINts lt channel gt 1 lt name gt 14400 User s Guide 195 8 L4450A 64 Bit Digital 1 0 with Memory and Counter CALCulate Digital Pattern Compare Alarm Limit Measure ment Statistics MX Scaling CALCulate COMPare DATA BYTEI1IWORDI2ILWORdI4 data lt ch_list gt CALCulate COMPare DATA lt ch_list gt CALCulate COMPare MASK BYTEI1 WORDI2ILWORdI4 data lt ch_list gt CALCulate COMPare MASK lt ch_list gt CALCulate COMPare STATe OFFIOIONI1 lt ch_list gt CALCulate COMPare STATe lt ch_list gt CALCulate COMPare TYPE EQUalINEQual lt ch_list gt CALCulate COMPare TYPE Q ch list CALOulate LIMit LOWer lt value gt IMINIMAXIDEF Q ch list CALCulate LIMit LOWer MINIMAX ch list CALOulate LIMit LOWer STATe OFFIOIONI1 ch list CALCulate LIMit LOWer STATe ch list CALOulate LIMit UPPer lt value gt I MINIMAXIDEF ch list CALCulate LIMit UPPer MINIMAX 8 ch list CALCulate LIMit UPPer STATe OFFIOIONI1 ch list CALCulate LIMit UPPer STATe ch list CALCulate AVERage AVERage lt ch_list gt CALCulate AVERage CLEar lt ch_list gt CALCulate AVERage COUNt lt ch_list gt CALCulate AVERage MAXimum lt ch_list gt CALCulate AVERage MAXimum TIME lt ch_list gt CALCulate AVERage MINimum lt ch_list gt CALCulate AVERage MINimum
111. RIVe MODE ROUTe RMODule BANK LED DRIVe ENABle ROUTe RMODule BANK LED DRIVe LEVel ROUTe CHANnel DRIVe PAIRed MODE ROUTe CHANnel DRIVe PULSe MODE ROUTe CHANnel DRIVe PULSe WIDTh ROUTe CHANnel DRIVe TIME RECovery ROUTe CHANnel DRIVe TIME SETTle ROUTe CHANnel DRIVe OPEN DEFault ROUTe CHANnel VERify ENABle ROUTe CHANnel VERify POLarity OFF OFF 1 OCOLlector ON 5 mA OFF ON 15 ms 0 0 seconds 0 0 seconds OPEN selected OFF NORMal L4400 User s Guide Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver 7 SYSTem PRESet RST SYSTem CPON and Power On These actions drive the channels to their defined DEFault state using the configuration stored on the remote module and force the system to recognize new topologies caused by power or connectivity changes These actions set the defaults shown in the table on page 152 Two parameters are controllable to ensure safety of operation in the system the default state for channel closure and the default state for drive enabled The default channel state open or closed for each channel can be set using either of the following commands ROUTe CHANnel DRIVe CLOSe DEFault ROUTe CHANnel DRIVe OPEN DEFault If a channel is configured for a single drive in pulsed mode OPEN operations are undefined When these channels are configured to a default state of OPEN no action is taken on these channels The drive state can be set as a default using the ROUTe RMODule DRIVe SOURce BOOT command This com
112. Rackmounting instructions are provided with the kit and are also provided here Rack Mounting Kit Contents The contents of the Y1160A sliding shelf rack mount kit are listed in Table 1 2 Table 1 2 L4400 Y1160A Rack Mount Kit Contents Item Description Part Number Quantity 1 4 8 flat head screw 1515 1367 12 2 10 32 pan head dress screw 0570 1577 4 3 10 32 x 0 625 pan head screw 2680 0105 10 4 10 32 x 0 5 flat head screw 2510 0283 2 5 10 32 clip on nut 0590 0804 12 6 10 32 nut w lock washer 2740 0003 4 7 Sliding shelf 5180 0102 1 8 Shelf rails 5180 0103 2 9 Filler panels 5180 0104 2 10 Rear rail brackets 5180 0105 2 Installation Instructions Y 1160 90030 1 14400 User s Guide 5 1 Introduction to the 14400 Series Instruments Procedure Figure 1 1 is a composite drawing of the Y1160A sliding shelf rack mount kit The drawing shows the location usage of the hardware items listed in Table 1 2 Figure 1 1 Y1160A Instrument Rack Mount Kit L4400 Series 6 14400 User s Guide Introduction to the 14400 Series Instruments 1 1 4400 instrument s can be mounted between any two adjacent unit indicators Figure 1 2 On Agilent racks an EIA unit indicator is represented by a triangle gt on the rack s front and rear facing columns single EIA unit extends from the triangle indicator to the next indicator on the column 1 Unit
113. Rce DlGital LEVel lt voltage gt IMINIMAXIDEF ch list SOURce DIGital LEVel MINIMAX 8 ch list SOURce DIGital MEMory ABORt Q ch list SOURce DIGital MEMory ENABle OFFIOIONI1 8 ch list SOURce DlGital MEMory ENABle ch list SOURce DIGital MEMory NCYCles lt count gt IMINIMAXIDEFIINFinity ch list SOURce DIGital MEMory NCYCles MINIMAX ch list SOURce DIGital MEMory STARt Q ch list SOURce DIGital MEMory STEP Q ch list SOURce DIGital MEMory STOP ch list SOURce DIGital MEMory TRACe lt name gt lt channel gt SOURce DIGital MEMory TRACe lt channel gt SOURce DIGital STATe OFFIOIONI1 lt ch_list gt SOURce DIGital STATe lt ch_list gt SOURce MODule CLOCk FREQuency lt frequency gt IMINIMAXIDEF 1 SOURce MODule CLOCk FREQuency MINIMAX 1 SOURce MODule CLOCk LEVel lt voltage gt IMINIMAXIDEF 1 SOURce MODule CLOCk LEVel MINIMAX 1 SOURce MODule CLOCk STATe OFFIOIONI1 1 SOURce MODule CLOCk STATe 1 TRACe TRACe CATalog lt channel gt 1 TRACe DATA DIGital BYTEI1IWORDI2ILWORdI4 9 channel lt name gt lt binary_block gt l lt value gt value lt value gt TRACe DATA DIGital FUNCtion lt channel gt COUNtIWONes lt name gt lt points gt TRACe DELete ALL lt channel gt 1 TRACe DELete NAME lt channel gt I1 lt name gt TRACe FREE lt channel gt 1 T
114. See Connecting the LAN Cables in Chapter 2 for more information L4400 Series Channel Addressing Scheme The channel addressing scheme for the L4400 series LXI instuments uses the form where ccc is the three digit channel number Following are examples of the scheme Refer to the individual instrument chapters for more information on channel numbering Table 3 2 L4400 Series Channel Addressing Examples Channel Number Definition 1014 Channel 14 on Bank 1 of the L4421A multiplexer module 1921 Channel 921 analog bus relay for ABUS 1 on Bank 2 of the L4421A multiplexer module or on Matrix 2 of the L4433A matrix module 1304 Row 3 column 4 on Matrix 1 of the L4433A matrix module 2 wire mode 1437 Row 3 column 7 on Matrix 4 of the L4433A matrix module 1 wire mode 1201 Channel 201 on Bank 2 of the L4450A digital I O module Introduction to the SCPI Command Language 52 The functions of the L4400 series instruments are programmed using SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments commands The L4400 Programmer s Reference located on the L4400 LXI Class C Instruments Prod uct Reference CD ROM p n 34989 13601 contains a complete description of each instrument s command set SCPI is an ASCII based instrument command language designed for test and measurement instruments SCPI commands use a hierarchical structure also known as a tree system In this system associ
115. Switch Hardware Description 134 L4437A Simplified Schematic 134 L4437A D Sub Connectors 135 34937T Terminal Block 136 7 Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver L4445A SCPI Command Summary 142 L4445A Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver 144 Recommended Switches and Attenuators 147 Power Supplies 148 Channel Numbering 149 Simple Switch Control 150 Remote Module Identifiers 151 Drive Modes 151 Using Single Drive Switches and Attenuators 152 Using Dual Drive Switches and Attenuators 153 Using Pulse Drive 154 Long Execution Times 155 Verifying Switch State 155 LED Drive 157 Default and Reset States 158 Y1150A 161 Y1151A 165 Y1152A 170 Y1153A 175 1154 180 1155 185 Mounting the Remote Modules 193 SCPI Programming Examples 194 14400 User s Guide 8 L4450A 64 Bit Digital 1 0 with Memory and Counter 14450 SCPI Command Summary 198 L4450A 64 Bit Digital 1 0 with Memory and Counter Basic Digital 1 0 Operations 206 Handshaking 209 Buffered 1 0 Operations 216 Interrupt Lines 219 Byte Ordering 220 Pattern Matching 221 Counter 222 Initiated Measurement Mode 223 Clock 224 L4450A D Sub Connectors 224 34950T Terminal Block 227 205 9 L4451A 4 Channel Isolated D A Converter with Waveform Memory L4451A 4 Channel Isolated D A Converter with Waveform Memory L4451A SCPI Command Summary 226 L4451A Example Program Segments 228 L4451A Simplified Block Diagrams 231 L4451A D Sub Connector Pinout 232 34951 Terminal Block 233
116. TATe Q ch list CALCulate COMPare TYPE EQUallINEQual ch list CALCulate COMPare TYPE Q ch list CALCulate LIMit _LOWer lt gt Q ch list CALCulate LIMit LOWer MINIMAX 8 ch list CALCulate LIMit _LOWer STATe OFFIOIONI1 G ch list CALCulate LIMit LOWer STATe ch list CALCulate LIMit UPPer lt gt Q ch list CALCulate LIMit UPPer MINIMAX G ch list CALCulate LIMit UPPer STATe OFFIOIONI1 Q ch list CALCulate LIMit UPPer STATe Q ch list CALCulate AVERage AVERage ch list CALCulate AVERage CLEar ch list CALCulate AVERage COUNt lt ch_list gt CALCulate AVERage MAXimum lt ch_list gt CALCulate AVERage MAXimum TIME lt ch_list gt CALCulate AVERage MINimum lt ch_list gt CALCulate AVERage MINimum TIME lt ch_list gt CALCulate AVERage PTPeak lt ch_list gt ROUTe Monitor ROUTe MONitor DATA ROUTe MONitor MODE CHANnelIDMM ROUTe MONitor MODE ROUTe MONitor STATe OFFIOIONI1 ROUTe MONitor STATe ROUTe MONitor CHANnel lt channel gt ROUTe MONitor CHANnel ROUTe MONitor CHANnel ENABle OFFIOIONI1 lt ch_list gt ROUTe MONitor CHANnel ENABle Q ch list L4400 User s Guide L4452A Multifunction Module with DIO D A Totalizer Scanning Channel Labeling Se
117. USY 1 ROUTe MODule WAIT 1 ROUTe MODule WAIT 1 L4400 User s Guide 14400 User s Guide L4445A Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver 7 Sequence Operation ROUTe OPEN lt ch_list gt ROUTe OPEN lt ch_list gt ROUTe OPEN ALL 1 ROUTe OPERation OVERlap ENABle OFFIOIONI1 ROUTe OPERation OVERlap ENABle ROUTe RMODule BANK DRIVe MODE TTLIOCOLlector 1 4IBANK1 BANKAIALL lt rem_ch_list gt ROUTe RMODule BANK DRIVe MODE 1 4IBANK1 BANK4 lt rem_ch_list gt ROUTe RMODule BANK LED DRIVe ENABle OFFIOIONI 1 1 4IBANK1 BANKAIALL lt rem_ch_list gt ROUTe RMODule BANK LED DRIVe ENABle 1 4IBANK1 BANK4 lt rem_ch_list gt ROUTe RMODule BANK LED DRIVe LEVel lt amps gt IMINIMAXIDEF 1 4IBANK1 BANK4IALL lt rem_ch_list gt ROUTe RMODule BANK LED DRIVe LEVel 1 4IBANK1 BANK4 lt rem_ch_list gt ROUTe RMODule BANK PRESet 1 4IBANK1 BANK4IALL lt rem_ch_list gt ROUTe RMODule DRIVe LIMit lt max_drives gt IMINIMAXIDEF lt rem_ch_list gt ROUTe RMODule DRIVe LIMit lt rem_ch_list gt ROUTe RMODule DRIVe SOURce BOOT OFFIINTernall EXTernal lt rem_ch_list gt ROUTe RMODule DRIVe SOURce BOOT lt rem_ch_list gt ROUTe RMODule DRIVe SOURce IMMediate OFFI INTernallEXTernal lt rem_ch_list gt ROUTe RMODuUule DRIVe SOURce IMMediate lt rem_ch_list gt ROUTe SEQuence ABORt ROUTe SEQuence BUSY ROUTe SEQuence
118. User s Guide Agilent 14400 Class Instruments User s Guide 2 Software Installation and Configuration Installing the Agilent IO Libraries and L4400 Instrument Drivers 14 Configuring the 14400 Instruments 17 GPIB Configuration 33 Firmware Updates 39 Instrument Power On and Default LAN Configuration States 45 This chapter contains the software installation and configuration procedures required for you to use the 1 4400 series instruments Also included are procedures for configuring the LAN and optional GPIB interfaces and for testing the communication IO paths to the instruments RE Agilent Technologies 13 2 Software Installation and Configuration Installing the Agilent 10 Libraries and L4400 Instrument Drivers Communication and control of the L4400 series instruments from a Microsoft programming environment is provided through the following software that is included with the L4400A instruments Agilent E2094A IO Libraries Suite 14 1 e Agilent L4400A Product Reference CD ROM p n 34989 13601 This section covers the sequence and procedures for installing the IO libraries and instrument drivers required to program the instruments Installing the Agilent 10 Libraries The Agilent IO Libraries Suite must be installed first followed by the L4400 instrument drivers that are located on the Product Reference CD ROM p n 34989 13601 The IO Libraries are contained on the Agilent Automa tion Ready CD include
119. User s Guide SW1 SW2 SW3 SWA SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8 State A ROUT OPEN xx01 ROUT OPEN xx02 ROUT OPEN xx03 ROUT OPEN xx04 ROUT OPEN xx05 ROUT OPEN xx06 ROUT OPEN xx07 ROUT OPEN xx08 State B ROUT CLOS xx01 ROUT CLOS xx02 ROUT CLOS 9xx03 ROUT CLOS xx04 ROUT CLOS xx05 ROUT CLOS 9xx06 ROUT CLOS xx07 ROUT CLOS 9xx08 7 187 7 Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver Y1150A LED Connectors LED1 and LED2 2 Q OOO O 6 199909099090015 NN LED1 Connector LED2 Connector Pin Use Pin Use Pin Use Pin Use 1 VI 2 SW1 A 1 VI 2 SW5 A 3 VI 4 SW1 3 VI 4 SW5 5 VI 6 SW2 A 5 VI 6 SW6 A 7 VI 8 SW2 7 VI 8 SW6 B 9 VI 10 SW3 9 VI 10 SW7 A 11 VI 12 SW3 B 11 VI 12 SW7 B 13 VI 14 SW4 A 13 VI 14 SW8 A 15 VI 16 SW4 B 15 VI 16 SW8 B 158 L4400 User s Guide Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver 7 Y1151A The Y1151A supports up to two of the Agilent microwave switches shown below Agilent Switch Description 87104A B C SPAT 4 port latching 87106A B C SP6T 6 port latching 87406B 6 port matrix Y1151A Switch Options Supported Recommended options are shaded Option Name Option Number Description and Comments Frequency Range letter suffix in model All options supported number Coil Voltage STD no options 24VDC nominal 20VDC to 32VDC allowed DC Connector Type STD 16 pin ribbon cable header 100 Solder lugs Can u
120. Viewing Stored Alarm Data 87 Using the Alarm Output Lines 88 L4400 User s Guide Using Sequences 89 Defining a Sequence 90 Querying the Sequence Definition 93 Executing a Sequence 93 Executing a Sequence on an Alarm Condition 94 Deleting Sequences 95 Reading the List of Stored Sequences 95 Instrument State Storage 96 Error Conditions 97 Relay Cycle Count 98 Calibration Overview 98 4 L4421A 40 Channel Armature Multiplexer Low Frequency Multiplexer Switch Instrument 102 L4421A Measurement Functions 102 L4421A SCPI Command Summary 103 L4421A Example Program Segments 105 L4421A 40 Channel Armature Multiplexer Hardware Description L4421A Simplified Schematic 108 L4421A D Sub Connectors 109 34921T Terminal Block 110 5 L4433A Dual Quad 4x8 Reed Matrix Matrix Switch Instrument 114 L4433A SCPI Command Summary 115 L4433A Example Program Segments 116 Linking Multiple L4433A Instruments 118 L4433A Dual Quad 4x8 Reed Matrix Hardware Description 120 L4433A Simplified Schematic for Two Wire Mode 122 L4433A D Sub Connectors for Two Wire Mode 123 34933T 001 Terminal Block for Two Wire Mode 124 L4433A Simplified Schematic for One Wire Mode 126 L4433A D Sub Connectors for One Wire Mode 127 34933 002 Terminal Block for One Wire Mode 128 L4400 User s Guide vii 6 L4437A General Purpose Switch General Purpose Switch Instrument 130 L4437A SCPI Command Summary 132 L4437A Example Program Segments 133 L4437A 32 Channel General Purpose
121. Y1155A Distribution Board 34945EXT Extender User supplied switch and cabling Figure 7 1 L4445A Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver Configuration 14400 User s Guide Each 34945EXT module can have up to four distribution boards installed You can have up to eight 34945EXT modules L4445A The L4445A driver interface can supply 24 V power to the first master remote module only The first remote module can also use an external power source Slave modules are connected in a daisy chain fashion using standard ethernet RJ 45 connectors and Cat 5 cables All slave modules must obtain 24V power from an external power supply Each module can be powered by a separate supply The Cat 5 Ethernet cable must be plugged in to port 1 on the master remote module Port 1 and Port 2 are interchangeable on all slaves distribution boards on each remote module must use the same power supply voltage 139 7 140 Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver Figure7 2 is a labeled drawing of the 34945EXT remote module Expansion Bus Bank 2 Ch 21 28 Ch 31 38 Bank 3 Ch 41 48 Ch 51 58 Bank 4 Ch 61 68 Ch 71 78 External Power Supply Connections 1 0 Access LED PP Figure 7 2 The 34945EXT Module Each 34945EXT has an I O Access LED used to indicate transactions between the L4445A and the 34945EXT module When power is first applied to a 34945EXT module this LED is continuously illuminated After the mod
122. aA JO search She Favorites neia 62 amp i Address D index html uns 275 Agilent Technologies Product Reference CD ROM A Release Notes Readme A Agilent IO Libraries A L4400 IVI COM amp IVI C Driver A L4400 IVI COM amp IVI C Driver for use with NI Switch Executive Software Instructions Instructions Install Instructions Install Instructions Install A L4400 LabVIEW Driver il L4400 Programming Examples Readme Install Figure 2 2 L4400 Product Reference CD ROM Software Driver Menu Install the appropriate driver from the menu based on the environment you will use to program the L4400 instruments Table 2 2 contains a list of common environments and corresponding drivers Accept all default directories specified during installation Table 2 2 L4400 Programming Environments and Recommended Drivers Programming Environment Recommended Drivers Microsoft Visual 6 0 Visual C ANSI C IVI C IVI COM VISA Microsoft Visual Basic 6 0 VISA VISA COM Microsoft Visual Studio NET for C C IVI COM Visual Basic Agilent VEE IVI COM National Instruments LabVIEW LabVIEW Plug amp Play with L44XX native mode driver IVI C National Instruments LabWindows CVI IVI C For information on firmware updates that may be available after purchase refer to Firmware Updates at the end o
123. acing you COM COM 1H 1L 2H 2L 3H 3L 1H 1L 4H 4L 14H 5H 5L 20H 201 0000090000000 00000 TSI 11H 11L 7H 7L 17H 13H 13L QL 19H 19 15H 151 Interlock 1 0 50 Pin D Sub Male Connector GND 6L 16H 16L 12H 12 8H 18H 18L 10H 10L 41L 411 42L 421 6 69 9 9 9 Description Description COMI H 7 COMIL 8 Interlock 1 17 Interlock 1 33 GND 34 TSIL 18 AMP 41L 47 AMP 411 48 AMP 42L 49 421 50 2 COM COM 21H 21 22H 22L 23H 23L 2H 2L 24H 24L 25H 25L 40H 401 Interlock2 95959 95959 9 0 09 9 09 30 Pi D Sub Male Connector 31H 31L 27H 27L 37H 37L 33H 33L 29H 29L 39H 39L 35H 35L Interock2 0000000000000000 AMP AMP AMP AMP GND 26H 26L 36H 32H 28H 28L 38H 38L 30L 43L 43 44L 4I 00 09 9 0 9 9 Description Description 21H 1 COM2H 7 21L 2 COM2 L 8 22H 3 Interlock2 17 22L 4 Interlock 2 33 23H 5 GND 34 23L 6 TSIL 18 24H 9 AMP 431 47 24L 10 AMP 431 48 25H 13 AMP 441 49 25L 14 AMP 441 50 107 4 14421 40 Armature Multiplexer 34921T Terminal Block This terminal block with screw type connections is labeled with the model number and the abbreviated module name All modu
124. al Clock In signal However both a user supplied external clock and the module s Clock Out cannot drive the line at the same time Trigger In You can configure each DAC on the module to trigger off an externally provided Trigger In that has a pulse width greater than 100 ns The Trigger In line is 5V TTL tolerant Trigger Out The DAC module can source a TTL level Trigger Out Trigger Out has a pulse width between 5 and 10 us 225 9 L4451A 4 Channel Isolated D A Converter with Waveform Memory The line between external Trigger Out and external Trigger In is shared You can use the external Trigger Out to provide the external Trigger In signal However both a user supplied external trigger and the L4451A Trigger Out cannot drive the line at the same time L4451A SCPI Command Summary Table 9 1 lists the instrument specific SCPI commands that apply to the L4451A 4 Channel Isolated D A Converter instrument Table 3 3 Chapter 3 lists the SCPI commands that apply to all L4400 series instruments For complete information on all SCPI commands refer to the Programmer s Reference contained on the L4400 Product Reference CD ROM p n 34989 13601 Table 9 1 L4451A SCPI Command Summary Subsystem Commands SOURce DAC SOURce CURRent LEVel lt current gt IMINIMAXIDEF lt ch_list gt SOURce CURRent LEVel MINIMAX lt ch_list gt SOURce FUNCtion TRIGger SOURce IMMediatelMANuallEXTernal lt ch_list gt
125. al is initially applied to channel 1 Drive is applied to channel 2 only after a power supply recovery period has elapsed T Recovery The power supply recovery time is set using the the ROUTe 1 DRIVe RECovery command This parameter may be set individually for each channel or will default to 0 0 ms following either a SYSTem RMODule RESet Or ROUTe RMODule BANK PRESet command If you are verifying the channel closure see page 149 you may also specify a T Settle parameter This parameter ensures the switch has had time to change state before the position indicator is evaluated This parameter may be set individually for each channel or will default to 0 0 ms following either a SYSTem RMODule PRESet or ROUTe RMODule BANK PRESet command L4400 User s Guide Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver 7 Using Dual Drive Switches and Attenuators 14400 User s Guide Many microwave switches and attenuators have a paired drive input Typically one drive is electrically connected to the lower channel number in a bank and one connected to a corresponding upper channel number For example a dual drive switch should have its State A coil connected to channel 21 and its State B coil connected to channel 31 on bank two The L4445A drives dual drive devices in pulsed mode only Pairing two channels automatically configures the channels to pulsed mode you must explicitly un pair the channels before continuous dri
126. an in progress use the ABORt command 14400 User s Guide 71 3 Operating and Programming Scan Trigger Source Usage L4421A 40 Channel Armature Multiplexer L4450A 64 Bit Digital I O digital input counter channels only L4452A Multifunction Module digital input totalizer channels only You can configure the event or action that controls the onset of each sweep through the scan list a sweep is one pass through the scan list You can set the instrument s internal timer to automatically scan at a specific interval You can also program a time delay between channels in the scan list see Channel Delay on page 77 You can start a scan when an external TTL trigger pulse is received You can start a scan when an alarm event L4450A L44524A is logged on the channel being monitored Interval Scanning In this configuration you control the frequency of scan sweeps by selecting a wait period from the start of one trigger to the start of the next trigger called the trigger to trigger interval If the scan interval is less than the time required to measure all channels in the scan list the instrument will scan continuously as fast as possible no error is generated Trigger 1 Trigger 2 93 Sweep 1 Sweep 2 Sweep i f N A Trigger Timer 0 to 359 999 seconds Figure 3 10 Trigger to Trigger Interval e You can set the scan interval to any value between 0 seconds and 9
127. an lists cannot include digital output channels or DAC voltage channels Rules for Scanning 14400 User s Guide Before you can initiate a scan you must set up a scan list to include all desired multiplexer or digital channels Channels which are not in the scan list are skipped during the scan By default channels are scanned in ascending order If your application requires non ordered scanning of the channels in the present scan list see Non Sequential Scanning on page 79 You can store at least 500 000 scan readings in instrument L4450A L4452A memory and all readings are automatically time stamped If memory overflows a status register bit is set and new readings will overwrite the first oldest readings stored The most recent readings are always preserved Using the DATA REMove or R command to retrieve readings during a scan REMOVES the readings from memory Using FETCh after the scan completes retrieves the readings and the readings also remain in instrument memory 69 3 70 Operating and Programming Each time you start a new scan the instrument clears all readings including alarm data stored in reading memory from the previous scan Therefore the contents of memory are always from the most recent scan The Analog Bus relays are automatically opened and closed as required during the scan to place the signal on the analog bus For example with the L4421A all 2 wire measurements use the 1 MEAS
128. annel advance input Trig In pin 6 Channel closed output Operating and Programming 3 Ext Trig Alarms DIO Port The external trigger alarms and DIO port enables you to synchronize scanning between a switching instrument such as the L4421A and an external DMM The port also allows you to output alarm signals to an external device or control system Figure 3 4 shows the pin out and signal definitions for the port Alarm 1 output pin 1 Trig Out pin 5 i Alarm 2 output pin 2 5 loo ooo p ug A Trig Alarms DIO A Trig 5 Gnd 9 External Trigger Usage Gnd pin 9 Alarm Usage 14400 User s Guide Input gt 1us Output Approx 2 us Figure 3 4 External Trigger and Alarm Port Pin Definitions GPIB Connector The GPIB interface is available on all 1 4400 series instruments as Option GPIB This option must be purchased with the product Products not ordered with the GPIB interface cannot be reconfigured to add it later LAN Port The LAN port on the L4400 series instruments supports 10 Mbps and 100 Mbps data transfer rates 10 100 The port is Non Auto which means that the LAN crossover cable supplied with the instrument 51 3 Operating and Programming must be used when connecting the L4400 instrument directly without a switch or router to the computer
129. ated commands are grouped together under a common node or root thus forming subsystems A portion of the ROUTe subsystem is shown below to illustrate the tree system ROUTe MONitor CHANnel ENABle mode G ch list CHANnel ENABle G ch list L4400 User s Guide Operating and Programming 3 ROUTe is the root keyword of the command MONitor is a second level key words CHANnel is a third level keyword and so on A colon separates a command keyword from a lower level keyword Syntax Conventions 14400 User s Guide The SCPI syntax convention can be defined using the command shown below ROUTe CHANnel DRIVe PULSe WIDTh lt seconds gt MIN MAX DEF lt ch list Keywords The command syntax shows that most commands and some parameters are a mixture of upper and lower case letters The upper case letters indicate the abbreviated spelling for the command For shorter program lines you can send the abbreviated form For better program readability you can send the long form For example in the above syntax statement DRIV and DRIVE are both acceptable forms You can also use a combination of upper and lower case letters When sending a command the abbreviated form or the complete spelling of the command must be used Any other combination will generate a syntax error Braces and Vertical Bars Braces enclose the parameter choices for a given command string The braces are not sent with
130. ation Interval The instruments should be calibrated on a regular interval determined by the accuracy requirements of your application A l year interval is adequate for most applications Accuracy specifications are warranted only if adjustment is made at regular calibration intervals Accuracy specifications are not warranted beyond the 1 calibration interval Agilent does not recommend extending calibration intervals beyond 2 years for any application Adjustment is Recommended Specifications are only guaranteed within the period stated from the last adjustment Whatever calibration interval you select Agilent recommends that complete re adjustment should always be performed at the calibration interval This will assure that the L4451A and L4452A will remain within specification for the next calibration interval This criteria for re adjustment provides the best long term stability Performance data measured during Performance Verification Tests does not guarantee the instruments will remain within these limits unless the adjustments are performed Use the Calibration Count feature see page 251 to verify that all adjustments have been performed L4400 User s Guide L4451A L4452A Calibration Procedures Time Required for Calibration The L4451A and L4452A can be automatically calibrated under computer control With computer control you can perform the complete calibration procedures and performance verification te
131. ation by sending the device clear message or the CALibration ABORt command CAUTION If you abort a calibration in progress by cycling power when the instrument is attempting to write new calibration constants to EEPROM you may lose all calibration constants for the function Typically upon re applying power the instrument will report error 705 Cal Aborted You may also generate errors 740 through 746 If this occurs you should not use the instrument until a complete re adjustment has been performed 252 14400 User s Guide L4451A and 14452 Calibration Procedures Performance Verification Tests Use the Performance verification tests to verify the performance of the instruments The performance verification tests use the instrument s specifications contained in the L4451A and L4452A Product Data Sheets L4451A and L4452A Performance Test Considerations For optimum performance all test procedures should comply with the following recommendations Assure that the calibration ambient temperature is stable and between 18 C and 28 C Ideally the calibration should be performed at 23 C 1 C Assure ambient relative humidity is less than 80 Install the plug in module and allow a 1 hour warm up period before verification or adjustment Use shielded twisted pair Teflon insulated cables to reduce settling and noise errors Keep the input cables as short as possible Remove all user wiring and connections
132. ber Description and Comments Frequency Range Various All options supported Coil Voltage 011 5VDC 5VDC Highest coil current requirement of all coil voltage options May limit system speed because current capacity limitations 34945EXT limits total switch current to 2A opt 011 coils draw 400 mA Therefore a maximum of 5 devices may be switched simultaneously 015 15VDC 024 24VDC required if using internal power DC Connector Type STD solder lugs RF Performance various All options supported Drive Options STD Direct coil connections for open collector drive T24 TTL 5V CMOS compatible inputs with 24VDC coils Note position indicators do not function wiring pattern differs from direct drive 15 TTL 5V CMOS compatible inputs with 15VDC coils Note position indicators do not function wiring pattern differs from direct drive L4400 User s Guide Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver 7 Y1155A Connections LED Connectors OO O00 O00 OOO 00090 OOO LL OOO OOO LL O00 LED1 i DRIVE FPWR 0 5 c lt O crew Terminals NI 2 Q 525555959595 OO OOO VR is the Voltage source for the Relay Vl is the Voltage source for the LED Indicator 876 Switches
133. cation test 262 digital 1 0 236 example programs 241 hardware description 236 performance test verification 261 security code 249 simplified block diagram 243 totalizer input 236 L4452A SCPI command summary 237 labels 68 LAN 48 LAN cables 18 private network connections 19 site network connections 20 LAN default states 45 LAN network considerations 17 selecting 17 LAN reset 48 Index LAN settings editing using the Web interface 30 latch mode alarms 88 LED descriptions 48 LED position indicators L4445A 155 limits alarms 84 linking multiple modules 118 locating instruments 22 lost calibration code 250 M manual scanning 73 master module 144 measurement functions L4421A 102 memory stored states 96 viewing alarm data 87 memory operations L4450A 216 memory storage 69 monitor mode applicable instruments 80 network connections private LAN 19 site LAN 20 network considerations 17 non sequential scanning applicable instruments 79 0 odometer 98 operating conditions 3 66 operating environment 2 overload fuse L4451A 224 paths sequences catalog 95 defining 89 deleting 95 executing 93 executing on alarm 94 querying definition 93 valid commands 90 pattern matching L4450A 221 performance test verification L4452A 261 performance verification L4451A 254 pinouts 267 Index L4421A 109 L4433A one wire mode 127 L4433A two wir
134. ce INTernallEXTernal ch list L4400 User s Guide L4450A 64 Bit Digital 1 0 with Memory andCounter 8 CONFigure DIGital HANDshake SYNChronous STRobe SOURce lt ch_list gt CONFigure DlIGital INTerrupt POLarity NORMalllNVerted lt ch_list gt CONFigure DIGital INTerrupt POLarity lt ch_list gt CONFigure DIGital POLarity NORMalllNVerted lt ch_list gt CONFigure DIGital POLarity lt ch_list gt CONFigure DIGital WIDTh BYTEI1IWORDI2ILWORdI4 lt ch_list gt CONFigure DIGital WIDTh lt ch_list gt MEASure Counter MEASure COUNter DCYCle lt gate_time gt IMINIMAXIDEF lt ch_list gt Totalizer MEASure COUNter FREQuency lt gate_time gt IMINIMAXIDEF lt ch_list gt MEASure COUNter PERiod lt gate_time gt IMINIMAXIDEF lt ch_list gt MEASure COUNter PWIDth lt gate_time gt IMINIMAXIDEF lt ch_list gt MEASure COUNter TOTalize READIRRESet lt ch_list gt Digital MEASure DIGital BYTEH WORDI2ILWORdI4 lt voltage gt NORMallINVerted G ch list SENSe Counter SENSe COUNter ABORt Q ch list Totalizer SENSe COUNter DATA Q ch list SENSe COUNter DCYCle DATA ch list SENSe COUNter FREQuency DATA ch list SENSe COUNIter FUNCtion FREQuencyIPERiodIDCYClel PWIDthl TOTalize G9 ch list SENSe COUNIter FUNCtion ch list SENSe COUNter GATE POLarit
135. ce which is a compiled series of SCPI commands stored in non volatile memory and identified by a user defined name Sequences can be used in a variety of applications such as creating a signal path from a device under test to a measurement device or sequencing relays in a specified order You can also uses sequences in conjunction with other operations to configure and synchronize complex measurements without having to send the routing commands each time The following tables summarizes the commands used to define execute and manage sequences For more information see the Programmer s Reference Help file on the L4400 series Product Reference CD ROM Sequence Definition ROUTe SEQuence DEFine lt name gt lt gt Defines a sequence ROUTe SEQuence DEFine lt name gt Returns sequence definition Sequence Execution ROUTe SEQuence ABORT Terminates currently running sequence ROUTe SEQuence BUSY Returns 1 if sequence is executing busy ROUTe SEQuence RUNNing NAME Returns name of currently running sequence ROUTe SEQuence TRIGger I MMediate Executes specified sequence ROUTe SEQuence WAIT Blocks until sequence has completed 89 3 Operating and Programming Sequence Management ROUTe SEQuence CATalog Returns list of defined sequence names ROUTe SEQuence DELete ALL Deletes all sequences from memory ROUTe SEQuence DELete NAME lt name gt Deletes specified sequence from memory
136. ce EXT 01301 This can occur since POLarity and SOURce are at the same node within the SENSe COUNter GATe command A colon and a semicolon are used to link commands from different sub systems as shown below INP IMP AUTO ROUT CHAN DEL 1 Using the MIN and MAX Parameters For many commands MIN or MAX can be used in place of a discrete parameter value For example ROUT CHAN DRIV PULS WIDTh MIN 1201 1202 sets the MINimum pulse width 0 001 available for the command Querying Parameter Settings Many SCPI commands have a complimentary command that allows you to query the current value of the parameters These commands are indicated by a in the command syntax For example ROUT CHAN DRIV PULS WIDTh 01201 queries the pulse with setting for channel 1201 14400 User s Guide Operating and Programming 3 Specifying Channel Lists and Scan Lists A command s channel list lt ch_list gt or scan list lt scan_list gt parameter is used to specify a single channel multiple channels or a range of channels The channel scan lists must be preceded with the symbol and must be enclosed in parentheses The following commands demonstrate how the chan nel list parameter is used ROUT CLOS 1010 close channel 10 ROUT CLOS 1010 1012 1015 close channels 10 12 and 15 ROUT CLOS 1005 1010 1015 close channels 5 10 and 15 When specifying a range of channels the first and last
137. cedures 249 Recommended Test Equipment 249 Calibration Security 250 Calibration Message 251 Calibration Count 251 Calibration Process 252 Aborting a Calibration in Progress 252 Performance Verification Tests 253 L4451A and L4452A Performance Test Considerations 253 L4451A 4 Channel Isolated DAC Module 253 L4452A Multifunction Module 261 RE Agilent Technologies L4451A and 14452 Calibration Procedures Calibration Procedures 248 This section contains performance verification and adjustment calibration procedures for the L4400 Series L4451A 4 Channel Isolated D A Converter and L4452A Multifunction Module Closed Case Electronic Calibration These instruments feature closed case electronic calibration No internal mechanical adjustments are required The instruments calculate correction factors based upon the readings from separate DMM sent to the instruments during the calibration procedure The new correction factors are stored in non volatile memory until the next calibration adjustment is performed Non volatile EEPROM calibration memory does not change when power has been off or after a remote interface reset Agilent Technologies Calibration Services When your instruments are due for calibration contact your local Agilent Service Center for low cost recalibration L4451A and 4452 are supported on automated calibration systems which allow Agilent to provide this service at competitive prices Calibr
138. ch positions Use the ROUTe RMODule BANK LED DRIVe LEVel command to set the drive current for the LEDs You do not need to provide an external current limiting resistor This command uses special channel addressing as described in Remote Module Identifiers on page 145 Once the drive current is set enable the LED drives using the ROUTe RMODule BANK LED DRIVe ENABle command This command uses special channel addressing as described in Remote Module Identifiers on page 145 The LEDs obtain their power from the remote module power supply If the ROUTe RMODule DRIVe SOURce OFF command has been sent the LEDs will not operate Simplified connections for the position indicators are shown in the diagrams beginning on page 184 151 7 152 Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver Default and Reset States L4445A allows several types of reset and default actions Most resets rely on states stored in non volatile memory on the remote modules Default parameters can be set to ensure the system always returns to a safe state SYSTem RMODule RESet This command is the only command that will reset all remote modules connected to the L4445A to the factory defaults No determination of the distribution boards present is made The system is set to the following conditions after executing this command ROUTe RMODule DRIVe SOURce IMMediate ROUTe RMODule DRIVe SOURce BOOT ROUTe RMODule DRIVe LIMit ROUTe RMODule BANK D
139. columns of two matrices on the same or separate modules L4400 User s Guide L4433A Dual Quad 4x8 Reed Matrix 5 Note that the presence of in rush resistors on the analog busses and columns require additional consideration and you must take care when linking multiple L4433As See the simplified schematics on page 120 and page 124 Increase number of rows by connecting through columns 1st L4433A 8 or 16 Columns n be 8or16 2nd L4433A Increase number of columns by connecting 16 or 32 Columns through rows 1st L4433A be 8 or 16 L4400 User s Guide 2nd L4433A 117 5 L4433A Dual Quad 4x8 Reed Matrix L4433A Dual Quad 4x8 Reed Matrix Hardware Description 118 You can configure the L4433A dual quad 4x8 reed matrix for 2 wire differential mode or 1 wire single ended mode L4433A contains 100 Q in rush resistors that are used to protect the reed relays from reactive loads If you have applications where in rush resistors interfere with measurements connections are provided on the terminal blocks for you to bypass the in rush resistors that are located on the columns See the simplified schematics on page 120 and page 124 However if you choose to bypass the in rush resistors the life of the reed relays that you bypass may be degraded Two Wire Mode To physically configure the module for 2 wire mode
140. count gt IMINIMAXIDEF SWEep COUN MINIMAX 14400 User s Guide 10 239 10 14452 Multifunction Module with DIO D A and Totalizer TRIGger Scanning TRIGger COUNt lt count gt IMINIMAXIDEFIINFinity TRIGger COUNt MINIMAX TRIGger SOURce IMMediatelIBUSIEXTernall ALARm1 IALARm2ITIMer TRIGger SOURce TRIGger TIMer seconds IMINIMAXIDEF TRIGger TIMer MINIMAX General TRG TRIGger COUNt lt count gt IMINIMAXIDEFIINFinity TRIGger COUNt MINIMAX TRIGger DELay lt seconds gt IMINIMAX TRIGger DELay MINIMAX TRIGger DELay AUTO OFFIOIONI1 TRIGger DELay AUTO TRIGger SOURce IMMediatelBUSIEXTernallTIMer TRIGger SOURce TRIGger SOURce ALARm MODE SINGlelCONTinuous TRIGger SOURce ALARm MODE TRIGger TIMer seconds IMINIMAXIDEF TRIGger TIMer MINIMAX OUTput OUTPut ALARm 112 CLEar Alarm Limit OUTPut ALARm CLEar ALL OUTPut ALARm MODE LATChITRACk OUTPut ALARm MODE OUTPUut ALARm 112 SEQuence OUTPut ALARm SLOPe NEGativelPOSitive OUTPut ALARm SLOPe OUTPut ALARm 112 SOURce lt ch_list gt OUTPUut ALARm 112 SOURce DATA DATA POINts EVENt THReshold num readings Reading DATA POINts EVENt THReshold Memory DATA POINts DATA REMove lt num_readings gt FETCh R lt max_count gt SYSTem TIME SCAN Measurement DATA LAST lt channel gt Statics 240 L4400 User s Guide L4452A Multifunction Module with DIO D A Tota
141. d Condensation can occur when the modules are moved from a cold to a warm environment or if the temperature and or humidity of the environment changes quickly The following table shows maximum voltage ratings for each module If conditions change ensure that condensation has evaporated and the instrument has thermally stabilized until pollution degree 1 conditions are restored before turning on power to the equipment Table 1 1 L4400 Series LXI Instrument Voltage Ratings Instrument Pollution Degree 1 Specifications Pollution Degree 2 Specifications L4421A 40 channels 300V rms or DC 1A 60 VA channel 40 channels 100V rms or DC 1A 60 VA channel L4433A Dual quad 4x8 matrix 150 Vpeak 0 5A 10 VA channel Dual quad 4x8 matrix 100 Vpeak 0 5 A 10 VA per channel L4437A 28 channels 300 V rms or DC 1A 60 VA per channel 4 channels 250 V rms or 30 VDC 5A 150 VA per channel 28 channels 100 V rms or DC 1A 60 VA per channel 4 channels 100 V rms or 30 VDC 5A 150 VA per channel L4445A See Chapter 7 LA445A See Chapter 7 LA445A L4450A 64 channels 5V 30 mA Max 64 channels 5v 30 mA Max L4451A 4 channels 16V 20 mA 4 channels 16V 20 mA L4452A 32 DIO channels 42V 400 mA 2 channel DAC 12V 10 mA 32 DIO channels 42V 400 mA 2 channel DAC 12V 10 mA L4400 User s Guide Introduction to the 14400 Series Instrument
142. d for 2 and then de asserted The H2 line is not used and is set to high impedance The timing of the output operation is controlled by the parameter set using the CONFigure DIGital HANDshake RATE command This setting affects strobe width memory clock rate as well as the setup and hold times Alternatively the reciprocal form of the command CONFigure DIGital HANDshake CTIMe can be used to specify the speed in terms of time instead of a rate The timing should be set such that the device receiving the data can read the data lines during the 2 time synchronous unbuffered output is shown in the diagram below default handshake line polarity Direction N Data Out Invalid X Valid For example the following SCPI commands set the L4450A to have a 16 bit output using synchronous handshake Two data outputs are then performed and the strobe line is pulsed for each The I O direction line is set low following the first SOURce DIGital DATA WORD command and remains low until the digital channel is reset of reconfigured CONF DIG WIDT WORD 01101 CONF DIG DIR OUTP 81101 CONF DIG HAND SYNC 01101 SOUR DIG DATA WORD hFFFF 01101 SOUR DIG DATA WORD h4DB5 01101 L4400 User s Guide L4450A 64 Bit Digital 1 0 with Memory and Counter 8 Synchronous Buffered Inputs You can use synchronous mode handshake with buffered memory input operations Buffered operations are described
143. d the crosspoint is row 3 column 7 For information on specific configurations refer to the simplified schematics for the L4433A later in this chapter For detailed example programs involving multiple drivers and development environments refer to the L4400 Product Reference CD ROM p n 34989 13601 Setting 1 wire and 2 wire Modes Example Configuring the L4433A for 2 wire or 1 wire mode The following command configures the L4433A for l wire measurements If you are using terminal blocks with the L4433A module be sure to use the corresponding 2 wire or 1 wire terminal block SYSTem MODule WIRE MODE WIRE1 1 After changing the 1 wire 2 wire mode on the L4433A you must cycle power on the L4433A for the new mode setting to take effect 14400 User s Guide 14400 User s Guide L4433A Dual Quad 4x8 Reed Matrix 5 Opening and Closing Channels Example Closing and opening matrix channels two wire mode The following commands close and open channels 311 and 312 through 315 of the L4433A in 2 wire mode The channel number represents the matrix crosspoint of a row one digit and a column two digits For example channel 311 represents crosspoint at row 3 and column 11 ROUTe CLOSe 1311 1312 1315 ROUTe OPEN 1311 1312 1315 Example Closing and opening matrix channels L4433A in one wire mode The following commands close and open channels 311 and 312 through 315 of the L4433A in 1 wire mode The channel number represents
144. d with the instrument or may be downloaded from the Agilent Developer Network website at http adn tm agilent com under Soft ware Downloads IO Libraries Suite Before installing the IO libraries review table 2 1 to verify that your computer meets the specifications required by the software Table 2 1 Agilent IO Libraries Suite System Requirements Processor 450 MHz Intel Pentium II or higher Operating System Windows XP Professional or Home Edition Service Pack 1 or later Windows 2000 Professional Service Pack 4 or later Web Browser Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 01 or greater recommended Available Memory 128 MB 256 MB or greater recommended Available Disk Space 225 MB required for installation 160 MB for Microsoft NET Framework 65 MB for Agilent IO Libraries Suite 175 MB required for operation 110 MB for Microsoft NET Framework 65 MB for Agilent IO Libraries Suite Video Super VGA 800x600 with 256 colors L4400 User s Guide Software Installation and Configuration 2 Close all applications on your computer Insert the Agilent Automation Ready CD into the CD ROM drive Follow the instructions as prompted during the installation Accept all default directories specified If the IO libraries installation does not start automatically select Start gt Run from the Windows Start menu and type lt drive gt autorun auto exe where lt drive gt is the designa tor of
145. dule The L4421A has analog bus relays on each of its two banks Therefore the interlock pins are present on both the Bank 1 and Bank 2 D sub connectors on the module Normally if you attempt to connect to the analog buses without a terminal block or cable connected an error is generated The SYSTem ABUS INTerlock SIMulate command allows you to temporarily disable errors generated by the Safety Interlock feature and enables the simulation mode Although Safety Interlock errors are suppressed in this mode the actual analog bus relays affected by the Safety Interlock are disabled as long as no terminal block or cable is connected to the module L4421A Measurement Functions The L4421A supports the measurement functions shown in Table 4 1 Measurements are made by routing the signals on the multiplexer to a separate digital multimeter DMM instrument using the L4421A analog bus 100 L4400 User s Guide L4421A 40 Channel Armature Multiplexer Table 4 1 L4421A Supported Measurement Functions Function Notes Voltage AC DC Current AC DC direct current measurements are allowed on channels 41 through 44 only external shunts are required for all other channels Frequency Period Ohms 2 wire Ohms 4 wire Thermocouple Optional 34921 T Terminal Block is required for thermo couple measurements with built in internal reference junction RTD 2 wire RTD 4 wire Thermistor
146. e ROUT SEQ DEF MYSEQ 1 The above command returns a string in the form the quotes are also returned ROUT CLOS 1001 1009 ROUT OPEN 1001 Executing a Sequence 14400 User s Guide After you have defined a valid sequence you can execute it to process the specified commands If the specified sequence name is not currently stored in memory an error will be generated If you attempt to trigger a sequence while one is already executing the trigger will be placed in a queue When the trigger queue is full a trigger ignored error will be generated To abort a sequence execution use the ROUTe SEQuence ABORt command or a Device Clear When the sequence is terminated the resultant instrument state will be determined by how much of the sequence had been executed when the ABORt Device Clear was received An ABORt command system abort executed from within a sequence will not terminate the sequence but will abort a scan The RST and SYSTem PRESet commands will also abort a sequence execution prior to performing their own actions When a sequence is defined the specified commands are checked for proper syntax and absolute parameter range limits If an error is detected during compilation the entire sequence will be discarded More extensive error checking such as channel range expansion and validation is performed when the sequence is executed 93 3 94 Operating and Programming A sequence may invoke an
147. e MONitor DATA Scanning with External Instruments 14400 User s Guide Usage L4421A 40 Channel Armature Multiplexer common application of the the L4421A is to scan the multiplexer channels using a separate instrument such as a DMM The DMM can be connected to the multiplexer s COM terminals on its terminal block Figure 3 13 or it can be connected and synchronized using the multiplexer s Analog Busses and Ext Trig ports 81 3 Operating and Programming DMM eel gianaanan N onaoooo Input Channels Common Terminals LL LLL Figure 3 13 Scanning with External Instruments Figure 3 14 shows the connections required to make a series scan of two wire measurements e g ohms DCV using ABusl of the L4421A Sequence The L4421A outputs a Channel Closed pulse on pin 5 of its Ext Trig connector when a relay is closed and has fully settled including any channel delay By connecting this pin to the DMM s external trigger Ext Trig input the DMM is triggered to take a measurement When the measurement is complete the DMM outputs a pulse from its DMM VM Complete output Connecting this output to pin 1 Channel Advance of the L4421A s Ext Trig connector advances the scan and closes the next channel in the scan list 82 L4400 User s Guide Operating and Programming 3 This handshake sequence continues until all channels are scanned and the programmed number of passes s
148. e is installed using the Agilent L4400 Firmware Update Utility also available on the web This section contains information for locating and downloading the update utility and firmware to your computer and then using the utility to install the firmware Downloading the Update Utility and Firmware 14400 User s Guide Firmware updates if available for the L4400 series instruments can be found on the Web at www agilent com find L4400 Once this page is displayed click on Library under the heading More Details From the Library window select Y L4400 Firmware Update Revision lt revision number gt Y Documents amp Downloads y Agilent L4400 Firmware Update Utility Save the utility application to a directory e g Temp on your PC Note the directory location as you will need to install the utility from this location Installing the Firmware Update Utility Downloading the firmware update utility copies the application to your PC but does not install the utility From the directory where the application was saved double click the firmware update utility application exe file For example FirmwareUpdateUtility_B_01_09_V3 exe This starts the application s installation wizard Follow the instructions as prompted This will create and install the utility in the directory C Program Files Agilent Firmware Update Utility 39 2 40 Software Installation and Configuration Downloading and
149. e DEFine lt name gt ROUTe SEQuence DELete ALL ROUTe SEQuence DELete NAME lt name gt ROUTe SEQuence RUNNing NAME ROUTe SEQuence TRIGger IMMediate lt name gt ROUTe SEQuence TRIGger SOURce lt name gt MANual ROUTe SEQuence TRIGger SOURce lt name gt ROUTe SEQuence WAIT SYSTem SYSTem MODule WIRE MODE WIRE1 IWIRE2 1 SYSTem ABUS INTerlock SIMulate OFFIOIONI1 SYSTem ABUS INTerlock SIMulate DIAGnostic DIAGnostic RELay CYCLes Q ch list DIAGnostic RELay CYCLes CLEar ch list 113 5 L4433A Dual Quad 4x8 Reed Matrix L4433A Example Program Segments 114 The following sections contain example program segments of commonly used instrument functions The channel addressing scheme used in these examples follow the general form where ccc is the three digit channel number The channel numbers for the L4433A are derived as follows Two wire mode For two wire mode the channel numbers are derived from the crosspoint or intersection of rows and columns columns having two digits See the example below Displayed Channel Means This 1304 An L4433A 2 wire mode where the crosspoint is row 3 column 4 One wire mode For one wire mode the channel numbers are derived from a specific matrix number and the crosspoint or intersection of rows and columns on that matrix See the example below Displayed Channel Means This 1437 L4433A in 1 wire mode with matrix 4 an
150. e L4452A as shown in Figure A 3 Configure the L4452A to output the voltages listed in Table A 5 For each voltage level measured subtract the offset voltage recorded in Step 2 as applicable The results should be within the limits listed in Table A 5 4 Repeat Step 3 for channel 7 It is not necessary to test the voltage output at the full rated 10 mA load Table A 5 L4452A Output Voltage Levels Channels 6 and 7 Output Voltage Error From Nominal 1 Year 10V 45 OV 20 mV 10V 45 mV DAC Output Adjustment The following analog output adjustment procedure is to be performed following a 1 hour warm up period This procedure sets a zero adjustment and a gain adjustment constant for each L4452A DAC output channel 6 and 7 You must complete all the adjustments on one channel before adjusting the other channel Voltage Adjustments 1 3 With the DMM disconnected from the L4452A set the DMM to the 100V range or the lowest range that can measure 16V do not use autorange Short the inputs to the DMM The DMM reading is the offset voltage for the selected range If the DMM has null capability turn it on at this time Otherwise record the offset which will be subtracted from the subsequent voltage measurements Unsecure the instrument for calibration using the command CALibration SECure STATe 0 code L4400 User s Guide 14400 User s Guide L4451A and L4452A Calibration Pr
151. e Programmer s Reference Help file Example Configuring an Agilent N1810UL The following example illustrate controlling an Agilent N1810UL attached to a Y1150A distribution board The distribution board is connected to Bank 1 of the first remote module attached to the L4445A This example uses the bank preset described on page 153 ROUTe RMODule DRIVe SOURce OFF 1100 ROUTe RMODule BANK PRESet BANK1 81100 ROUTe RMODule DRIVe SOURce INT 1101 ROUT CLOSe 1101 Example Configuring a Paired Drive Channel The following example illustrates the sequence of commands used to configure a paired drive channel In the example the operations are directed to channel 1 on remote module 3 The drive source must be disabled before configuring either the channel pairing or the pulse mode The channel is then paired and the pulse width set to 15 ms Power supply recovery time and settling time is then set to 12 ms and 10 ms respectively Verify is then enabled The default behavior for the switches is set to OPEN and TTL drive using an EXTernal power supply Finally the channel is closed ROUTe RMODule DRIVe SOURce OFF 81300 ROUTe CHANnel DRIVe PAIRed 81301 ROUTe CHANnel DRIVe PULSe 0 015 1301 ROUTe CHANnel DRIVe TIME SETTle 0 012 1301 ROUTe CHANnel DRIVe TIME RECove
152. e Wiring Description Example Part Numbers Cable with Viking connector on attenuator Agilent 8120 2178 end bare wires on other end 12 conductor round cable 22 or 24 AWG stranded 0 25 dia Screw terminals provided on Y1153A distribution cable connection 12 pin Viking Industries Inc circular connector Viking connector body TNP12 102P contacts TS 100 AU See attenuator manual Y1153A Attenuator Control All channel are operated in PATRed mode Attenuation Section In Attenuation Section Out ATTEN 1 SECTION 1 ROUT OPEN xx01 ROUT CLOS xx01 ATTEN 1 SECTION 2 ROUT OPEN xx02 ROUT CLOS xx02 ATTEN 1 SECTION 3 ROUT OPEN xx03 ROUT CLOS xx03 ATTEN 1 SECTION 4 ROUT OPEN xx04 ROUT CLOS xx04 ATTEN 2 SECTION 1 ROUT OPEN xx05 ROUT CLOS xx05 ATTEN 2 SECTION 2 ROUT OPEN xx06 ROUT CLOS xx06 ATTEN 2 SECTION 3 ROUT OPEN xx07 ROUT CLOS xx07 ATTEN 2 SECTION 4 ROUT OPEN xx08 ROUT CLOS xx08 ROUTe OPEN adds that section s attenuation amount to the overall attenuation Total attenuation is the sum of the dB amounts for the individual sections switched in When all channels open at reset maximum attenuation is set 172 L4400 User s Guide C 13 15 Y1153A LED Connectors LED1 and LED2 VI VI VI VI VI VI VI VI Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver 7 20000002020 10000000201 LED1 Connector Pin 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 Use P
153. e contained in Chapter 11 L4400 User s Guide Agilent 14400 Class Instruments User s Guide ee 4 L4421A 40 Channel Armature Multiplexer Low Frequency Multiplexer Switch Instrument 100 L4421A Measurement Functions 100 L4421A SCPI Command Summary 101 L4421A Example Program Segments 103 L4421A 40 Channel Armature Multiplexer Hardware Description 104 34921T Terminal Block 108 RE Agilent Technologies 99 4 14421 40 Armature Multiplexer Low Frequency Multiplexer Switch Instrument The L4421A low frequency multiplexer MUX switch module features two banks of channels that provide broad multiplexing and measuring capabilities You can close more than one channel in each bank simultaneously N 1 configuration on the multiplexer Safety Interlock The Analog Buses of the L4400 series instruments are capable of carrying 300V signals The L4421A instrument has a hardware Safety Interlock feature that automatically opens the analog bus relays when the associated interlock pins on the D sub connectors faceplate lose continuity This prevents signals on the analog buses from being present on the D sub connector pins Optional terminal blocks available from Agilent automatically provide continuity for these interlock pins If cables are used you must provide continuity for the interlock pins in your DUT assembly See the pinout information later in this chapter for the location of interlock pins on each mo
154. e instruments 74 SCPI command summary all instruments 55 L4421A 103 L4433A 115 L4437A 132 L4445A 142 L4450A 198 L4451A 226 L4452A 237 SCPI errors 97 SCPI programming braces and vertical bars 53 brackets 53 channel lists and scan lists 55 command separators 54 keywords 53 linking commands 54 MIN and MAX parameters 54 optional parameters 53 querying parameter settings 54 syntax conventions 53 security code calibration 250 sense terminals L4451A 224 sequence definition 90 sequences applicable instruments 89 catalog 95 defining 89 deleting 95 executing 93 executing on alarm 94 querying definition 93 valid commands 90 settling delay 77 settling time L4445A 154 shelf rails 7 shielded cables 4 simplified block diagrams L4451A 231 L4452A 243 simplified schematics L4421A 108 L4433A one wire mode 126 L4433A two wire mode 122 L4437A 134 simulation mode Safety Interlock 67 site LAN considerations 18 slave module 144 snubber circuitry L4437A 136 solder cup connectors 4 stored states 96 sweep count 76 applicable instruments 76 switch position indicators L4445A 155 switch verification L4445A 155 synchronous handshake mode L4450A 211 syntax conventions 53 T technical support ii temperature limits 66 temperature sensor 110 L4437A 130 terminal block 34950T 227 terminal blocks 4 34921T 110 34951T 233 34952T 245 L4433A one wire
155. e mode 123 L4437A 135 L4450A 224 L4451A 232 L4452A 244 pollution degree 2 pollution degree definitions 66 porting applications 65 position indicators L4445A 155 power cord connecting 11 power fail jumper L4437A 130 power on states 45 private LAN networks 17 programming examples 59 C 60 61 IVI COM NET 59 L4400 and 34980A instruments 64 porting to other instruments 65 VISA and VISA COM 62 Visual Basic 6 0 61 Visual Basic NET 60 proxy server 21 PWR 48 0 querying parameter settings 54 rack mount kit contents 5 rack mounting 5 7 connecting the shelf to the rack frame 11 installing the sliding shelf 9 reading digital data L4450A 206 reading format 79 applicable instruments 79 reading storage 69 rear panel overview 50 recall stored state 96 recommended drivers 16 recommended test equipment calibration 249 recovery time L4445A 154 relative reading format 79 relay cycle count 98 applicable instruments 98 relay odometer 98 remote module identifiers 151 remote sensing L4451A 224 268 5 safety interlock 67 102 safety symbols ii scan interval 72 scanlist 71 applicable instruments 71 scan lists 55 scan sweep count 76 scan trigger 72 applicable instruments 72 scan trigger count 75 scanning 69 adding channels 71 applicable instruments 69 external 81 non sequential 79 on alarm 74 rules 69 scanning manual 73 scanning on alarm applicabl
156. e user defined label previously assigned to channel 3 in slot 1 The channel will now be identified by its factory default label 5 MUX CH BANK 1 COL4 DIO BYTE 1 ROUT CHAN LABEL 091003 14400 User s Guide Operating and Programming 3 The following command clears all user defined channel labels on the instrument and restores the factory default labels ROUT CHAN LABEL CLEAR MOD 1 Scanning Applications Usage L4421A 40 Channel Armature Multiplexer L4450A 64 Bit Digital I O digital input counter channels only L4452A Multifunction Module digital input totalizer channels only Channels on selected L4400 series instruments can be scanned by separate devices such as a DMM During a scan the instrument channels are connected to the device and a measurement reading is made one channel at a time Once the measurement is complete the scan advances to the next channel in the list until the end of the scan list is reached and the number of passes sweeps through the scan list is complete For scanning applications involving the L4421A and a DMM readings are stored on the DMM For applications involving scans of the digital input and counter channels of the L4450A and the digital input and totalizer channels of the L4452A readings are stored in L4450A L4452A memory Scanning is not allowed with the other L4433A L4437A L4445A switching instruments Also sc
157. e wiring used 7 I 1 35 i 2 i H oooooooooooo with the terminal block must be rated for the highest voltage that will be present on the terminal block or on the analog bus L4400 User s Guide 34921T Terminal Block L4421A 40 Channel Armature Multiplexer 109 4 14421 40 Armature Multiplexer THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK 110 14400 User s Guide Agilent 14400 Class Instruments User s Guide 5 L4433A Dual Quad 4x8 Reed Matrix Matrix Switch Instrument 112 L4433A SCPI Command Summary 113 L4433A Example Program Segments 114 Linking Multiple L4433A Instruments 116 L4433A Dual Quad 4x8 Reed Matrix Hardware Description 118 34933T 001 Terminal Block for Two Wire Mode 122 34933T 002 Terminal Block for One Wire Mode 126 RE Agilent Technologies 111 5 L4433A Dual Quad 4x8 Reed Matrix Matrix Switch Instrument The L4433A Dual Quad 4x8 Reed Matrix switch offers a convenient way for you to connect multiple instruments to multiple points on your DUT For a lower cost and better specification alternative you can connect both the L4433A matrix instrument and the L4421A multiplexer instrument Although flexible it is possible to connect more than one source at the same time with the matrix Make sure that dangerous or unwanted conditions are not created by these connections The featur
158. echnology Licenses The hardware and or software described in this document are furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of such license Restricted Rights Legend If software is for use in the performance of a U S Government prime contract or sub contract Software is delivered and licensed as Commercial computer soft ware as defined in DFAR 252 227 7014 June 1995 or as a commercial item as defined FAR 2 101 a or as Restricted computer software as defined in FAR 52 227 19 June 1987 or any equivalent agency regulation or contract clause Use duplication or disclosure of Software is subject to Agilent Technologies standard commercial license terms and non DOD Departments and Agencies of the U S Gov ernment will receive no greater than Restricted Rights as defined in FAR 52 227 19 1 2 June 1987 U S Govern ment users will receive no greater than Limited Rights as defined in FAR 52 227 14 June 1987 or DFAR 252 227 7015 b 2 November 1995 as applicable in any technical data Safety Notices CAUTION A CAUTION notice denotes a haz ard It calls attention to an operat ing procedure practice or the like that if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in damage to the product or loss of important data Do not proceed beyond a CAUTION notice until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met A WARNING notice denotes a
159. ector pinouts one wire mode 127 connector pinouts two wire mode 123 linking multiple modules 118 L4400 User s Guide L4433A example program segments 116 L4433A hardware description 120 L4433A instrument overview 114 L4433A 5 command summary 115 L4433A simplified schematic one wire mode 126 14433 simplified schematic two wire mode 122 L4433A terminal block one wire mode 128 L4433A terminal block two wire mode 124 14437 connector pinouts 135 power fail jumper 130 snubber circuitry 136 terminal block 136 L4437A example programs 133 L4437A hardware description 134 L4437A SCPI command summary 132 L4437A simplified schematic 134 L4437A temperature sensor 130 L44387 instrument overview 130 L4445A channel numbering 149 channel pairing 153 continuous drive mode 152 default and reset states 158 description 144 dimensions 193 distribution boards 160 drive modes 151 dual drive mode 153 example configurations 145 146 execution times 155 1 0 Access LED 146 LED position indicators 155 open collector drive mode 151 pulse drive mode 154 recovery time 154 settling time 154 single drive mode 152 switch verification 155 TTL drive mode 151 L4445A example programs 194 L4445A SCPI command summary 142 14450 buffered input 218 buffered output 216 byte ordering 220 channel drive voltage 208 channel numbering and width 206 channel polarity 2
160. ed STD 16 pin ribbon cable header 100 Solder lugs Can use ribbon cables with the Y1152A or discrete wires with the Y1155A UK6 UKS All options supported STD Direct coil connections for open collector drive 164 L4400 User s Guide Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver 7 Y1152A Connections LED Connectors 999909999 900999999 999950999 999990999 87204 87206 87606 811 N1812 Switch 00000909090 U 90099 Connectors 0009000090 OOOO 7 SW SWS OOOO OO OOO OO OOOO OOOO OOOO OOO OOOO TOO 9 9 9 OOOO 9 2 OOOO OOOO OOOO OOOO Y1152A Switch connector SW1 87204 06 29999099900016 199090990909015 E Pin Use Pin Use 1 VR 2 N C 3 Close 1 4 1 5 Close 2 6 2 7 Close 3 8 3 9 Close 4 10 Open 4 11 Close 5 12 Open 5 13 Close 6 14 Open 6 15 GND 16 N C L4400 User s Guide 165 7 Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver Y1152A Switch Connector SW2 and SW3 N181x 2OOO OO 199909909909 Pin Use 1 GND 3 N C 5 Drive B 7 Drive A 9 VR 10 Use IND B VI IND A VI N C VR is the Voltage source for the Relay Vl is the Voltage source for the LED Indicator Pin 1 00000000 00000000 Distribution Board Connector Pin 1 00000000 000
161. ed outputs you download traces of digital data to the memory Multiple traces up to 32 can be downloaded into each bank A specified trace is then output using the handshaking parameters set The general steps to output from memory are 1 Set the channel width and direction 2 Set the handshake mode Set the trigger source Set the number of times to output the trace Load the trace s into memory Set which trace to use Enable the memory one c a A Trigger the output Set the channel width and direction Use the SOURce DIGital DATA command to set the channel width and set the channel as an output Additionally the data specified in the command will be the initial state of the data lines before the memory operation begins Set the handshake mode You must use synchronous handshaking mode You can use either an internal or external strobe clock to pace the outputs Handshaking is described in more detail on page 203 Set the trigger source By default the trigger source is set to use a software trigger You can also use one of the interrupt lines see page page 213 as a trigger source L4400 User s Guide 14400 User s Guide L4450A 64 Bit Digital 1 0 with Memory and Counter 8 Set the number of times to output the trace Each trace can be output once multiple times or infinitely The SOURce DIGital MEMory NCYCles command sets the number of times to output the trace If not set to infinite you can output
162. els in each bank the devices can be controlled using only the lower channel number For example when a paired coil device is installed on bank 2 channels 21 and 31 are paired and are controlled using only channel 21 The following SCPI command closes channel 5 on the master remote module connected to the L4445A ROUT CLOS 1105 You can also use a range of channel numbers You could close all the channels on the master remote module connected to a L4445A by sending the following command ROUT CLOS 1101 1178 Note that when single coil devices are used the channel numbering is not consecutive across all 16 channels in a bank 143 7 144 Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver Simple Switch Control All examples in this chapter make reference to SCPI commands for switch control The L4445A commands are summarized in Table 7 1 For more information refer to the Programmer s Reference help file included on the Product Reference CD ROM p n 34989 13601 The switches and attenuators are designed to respond to the SCPI ROUTe CLOSe and ROUTe OPEN commands For example to open and close a switch attached to channel 1 on bank 1 of the second remote module attached to the L4445A you could use the following commands rem 2 channel 01 ROUT OPEN 1201 ROUT CLOS 1201 Before you can close or open a switch however several other parameters must be configured Each distribution board has a set of factory default
163. enerally configured Int Clock Ext Clock Out Enable Int Trig Ext Trig Out Enable User Supplied Connections lt q p Ext Clock In Out 16 Bits 16 Bits 16 Bits 16 Bits dl ldld lt gt Ext Trig In Out Channel 001 Channel 002 Channel 003 Channel 004 For more detail on the internal configuration of each DAC channel see the next page 14400 User s Guide 231 9 9 L4451A 4 Channel Isolated D A Converter with Waveform Memory The following diagram shows individual DAC channel configuration All channels are configured the same User Supplied Connections Calibration Constant non volatile memory DAC x 1 of 4 Channels e e HI Voltage Sense e HI Voltage Current p 25 mA Thermal Fuse resettable oe LO Voltage Current Immediate Data 16 Bits Internal Clock Internal Trigger Waveform Memory LO Voltage Sense Ext Clock In Out Ext Trig In Out L4451A D Sub Connector Pinout GND NC 4L 4H 3H GND GND GND NC 2L 2H GND NC 1L 1H GND 00000000090009000 4L 4H SH GND Sense Sense Sense Sense GND ak TRIG GND GND GND mae GND 000000000000000 GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND 00000000000000 9 50 Pin D Sub Female Connector
164. ent in your country of specific location You can also contact your Agilent Technologies Representative h oi DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY t Agi lent Technologies According to ISO IEC Guide 22 and CEN CENELEC EN 45014 C Manufacturer s Agilent Technologies Incorporated Manufacturer s Address 815 14 St SW Loveland 80537 USA Declares under sole responsibility that the products as originally delivered Model Number Product Name L4421A LXI 40 Channel Armature Multiplexer L4433A LXI Dual Quad 4x8 Reed Matrix L4437A LXI 32 Channel General Purpose Switch L4445A LXI Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver L4450A LXI 64 Bit Digital I O L4451A LXI 4 Channel Isolated D A Converter L4452A LXI Multifunction Module Product Options This declaration covers all options of the above product s comply with the essential requirements of the following applicable European Directives and carry the CE marking accordingly Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC amended by 93 68 EEC EMC Directive 89 336 EEC amended by 93 68 EEC and conform with the following product standards EMC Standard Limit IEC 61326 1 1997 A1 1998 EN 61326 1 1997 A1 1998 CISPR 11 1990 EN 55011 1991 Group 1 Class A IEC 61000 4 2 1995 A1 1998 EN 61000 4 2 1995 4 kV CD 4 kV AD IEC 61000 4 3 1995 EN 61000 4 3 1995 3 V m 80 1000 MHz IEC 61000 4 4 1995 EN 61000 4 4 1995 0 5 kV signal lines 1 kV power lines IEC 61000 4 5 1995 EN
165. ent memory Therefore whenever power is cycled the volatile memory empties of data it has contained The waveform feature of the L4451A is not intended as a full featured substitute for a function generator but as a means of storing point to point updates Clock In You can configure each DAC channel on the instrument to synchronize off either an internally generated 20 MHz clock or the positive edge of an external user supplied clock An external clock must be less than 10 MHz or indeterminate behavior will result Additionally the maximum point to point update rate of the DACs is 200 kHz If you configure a DAC to run off an external clock you will need to ensure that the correct clock divisor is also configured for that DAC For example if you supply a 10 MHz external clock the minimum clock divisor is 50 because the maximum update rate is 200 kHz If a clock divisor less than the minimum is configured indeterminate behavior will results Thresholds for the external clock input are 5 V TTL tolerant Clock Out There is one clock output on the DAC module which you can configure to output at frequencies up to 10 MHz Since it uses a 16 bit clock divisor the available output frequencies range in steps of 20 MHz 216 with a minimum output frequency of 305 Hz The output impedance of the Clock Out is 50 Q The line between external Clock Out and external Clock In is shared You can use the external Clock Out to provide the extern
166. er L4452A Multifunction Module 236 The L4452A Multifunction Module with DIO D A and Totalizer combines four 8 bit ports of digital input output a 100 kHz totalizer and two 12 volt earth referenced analog outputs You can include digital inputs and totalizer input in a scan list You can make connections via standard 50 pin D sub cables or the optional 34952T terminal block Digital Input Output The Digital Input Output DIO consists of four 8 bit ports with TTL compatible inputs and output The open drain outputs can sink up to 400 mA You can configure the DIO ports for 8 16 or 32 bit operations The DIO channels are connected by internal 5 V pull up resistors when configured as inputs Totalizer Input The 32 bit totalizer can count pulses up to 100 kHz You can configure the totalizer to count on the rising edge or falling edge of the input signal A TTL high signal applied to the Gate terminal enables counting and a low signal disables counting A TTL low signal applied to the Not Gate terminal enables counting and a high signal disables counting The totalizer counts only when both terminals are enabled When the gate is not connected the gate terminal is pulled to the enabled state effectively creating a gate always condition Analog Output DAC The two analog outputs are capable of outputting voltages between 12 volts with 16 bits of resolution Each DAC channel is capable of driving sinking 10 mA maximum c
167. er of scan trigger commands that will be accepted before terminating the scan See Trigger Count on page 75 for more information Mx B scaling and alarm limits 1 4450 L4452A are applied to measurements during a manual scanning operation and all data is stored in volatile memory The following program segment configures the instrument for a manual scanning operation TRIG SOURCE BUS Select bus manual mode TRIG COUNT 2 Sweep the scan list 2 times INIT Initiate the scan Then send the TRG trigger command to begin each scan sweep Note To stop a scan send the ABORt command 73 3 74 Operating and Programming Scanning on Alarm Usage L4450A 64 Bit Digital I O counter channels only L4452A Multifunction Module totalizer channels only In this configuration the instrument initiates a scan each time a reading crosses an alarm limit on a channel You can also assign alarms to channels on the digital modules For example you can generate an alarm when a specific bit pattern or bit pattern change is detected on a digital input channel or when a specific count is reached on a totalizer channel For complete details on configuring and using alarms refer to Alarm Limits on page 84 In this scan configuration you can use the Monitor function to continuously take readings on a selected channel and wait for an alarm on that channel Channels do not have to be part of an active scan list to be monitored h
168. ernal analog bus relays for this configuration For example closing analog bus channels 913 and 923 connects Bank 1 and Bank 2 through ABus3 Or externally you can connect COMI to COM2 to create this configuration Low thermal offset voltage makes the L4421A ideal for low level signal switching The 34921T optional terminal block provides a built in thermocouple reference junction that helps minimize errors due to thermal offset when you measure thermocouples 4421 has the capability to scan as many as 100 channels second using modern DMMs With the automatic break before make connection operation you are assured that no two signals are connected to each other during a scan When using the module in a non scanning mode you can close as many channels as you wish This module is safety interlock protected which means whenever the D sub connector end of the instrument is exposed the analog bus relays automatically open and disconnect from the analog bus For more information refer to page 100 and page 107 When power is off all channel relays maintain state and the analog bus relays open 105 4 14421 40 Armature Multiplexer L4421A Simplified Schematic This drawing shows the L4421A configured as two independent 20 channel 2 wire MUXes NOTE The three digit number assigned to each switch represents the channel number NOTE 1 Bank Relays Armature latching H H H H Analog
169. ernal clock is shown in the diagram below default handshake line polarity HO Start Stop 12 CYCLE lt Last Cycle gt gt lt gt Data Out Invalid L4400 User s Guide L4450A 64 Bit Digital 1 0 with Memory and Counter 8 Optionally you can provide an external strobe input on the H2 line to control the memory transfers If you pace the memory inputs from an external clock the L4450A will sense the leading edge of the strobe and set the data The data will be valid after Tpp and the receiving device may latch the data Tpp ranges from 140 ns to 60 ns The maximum Tpp of 140 ns limits operation in this mode to 7 MHz A synchronous buffered output using an external clock is shown in the diagram below default handshake line polarity gt H2 Clock In i Data Out Invalid 14400 User s Guide For example using the internal strobe the following SCPI commands set the L4450A to have a 32 bit output using synchronous handshake The number of times to output the traces is set to 4 A trace is then loaded into memory and assigned to the channel The memory is enabled and then triggered The start stop line is set high following the first byte handshake and remains high until the last byte is output CONF DIG WIDT LWOR 1101 CONF DIG DIR OUTP 1101 CONF DIG HAND SYNC 1101 SOUR DIG MEM NCYC 4
170. error queue The error queue is not cleared by a Factory Reset RST command or an Instrument Preset SYSTem PRESet command The following command is used to read errors from the error queue One error is read per command 14400 User s Guide SYSTem ERRor 97 3 Operating and Programming Relay Cycle Count Usage L4421A 40 Channel Armature Multiplexer L4433A Dual Quad 4x8 Reed Matrix L4437A General Purpose Switch L4445A Microwave Switch Attenuator The number of relay cycles can be determined to help you predict relay end of life The instrument counts the cycles on each relay and stores the total count in non volatile memory e n addition to the channel relays you can also query the count on the Analog Bus relays and bank relays You can reset the cycle count on any of the channel relays Analog Bus relays or bank relays but the instrument must be unsecured See Chapter 11 for information on unsecuring the instrument The following command is used to read the cycle count on the specified instrument channel s DIAG RELAY CYCLES G ch list The following command is used to reset the cycle count on the specified instrument channel s DIAG RELAY CYCLES CLEAR G ch list Calibration Overview Usage L4451A 4 Channel Isolated D A Converter L4452A Multifunction Module The L4400 series instruments requiring calibration are the L4451A and the L4452A Calibration procedures for these instruments ar
171. es of the L4433A include Non latching reed switches that can be configured for differential 2 wire mode which has two dual matrices Each matrix is organized in a 4 row by 8 column configuration single ended 1 wire mode which has four quad matrices Each matrix is organized in a 4 row by 8 column configuration Safety Interlock Analog Buses of the L4400 series instruments are capable of carrying 300V signals The L4433A instrument has a hardware Safety Interlock feature that automatically opens the analog bus relays when the associated interlock pins on the D sub connectors faceplate lose continuity This prevents signals on the analog buses from being present on the D sub connector pins Optional terminal blocks available from Agilent automatically provide continuity for these interlock pins If cables are used you must provide continuity for the interlock pins in your DUT assembly See the pinout information later in this chapter for the location of interlock pins on each module The L4433A matrix instrument has analog bus relays on Bank 2 only Therefore the interlock pins are present on only the Bank 2 D sub connectors Normally if you attempt to connect to the analog buses without a terminal block or cable connected an error is generated The SYSTem ABUS INTerlock SIMulate command allows you to temporarily disable errors generated by the Safety Interlock feature and enables the simulation mode Although Sa
172. eting Sequences You can delete sequences to free up space in memory previously allocated for the sequence If you attempt to delete a sequence while it is executing an error will be generated To abort a sequence execution use the ROUTe SEQuence ABORt command or a Device Clear Deleting a sequence will remove its association with an alarm if used see Executing a Sequence on an Alarm Condition on page 94 for more information The following command deletes the sequence named TOTAL_1 ROUT SEQ DEL TOTAL 1 The following command deletes all sequences from memory ROUT SEQ DEL ALL Reading the List of Stored Sequences 14400 User s Guide You can read the names of all sequences currently stored in memory When stored in memory the user defined sequence names are converted to all uppercase letters For example when stored Total 1 is converted to 1 Up to 500 unique sequences can be stored in non volatile memory Each sequence is limited to 1024 bytes The following command returns a comma separated list of sequence names currently stored ROUT SEQ CAT The above command returns a string in the form 95 Operating and Programming MYSEQ 1 DUT1 SW_PATH2 If no sequence names have been stored a null string string is returned Instrument State Storage Usage All L4400 Series Instruments The L4400 series instruments have five storage locations in non
173. eviated by including only the upper case letters in the com mand syntax The Interactive IO window is used to set the GPIB address as shown in 35 2 36 Software Installation and Configuration Figure 2 19 In this example the GPIB address is set to 10 f Agilent Interactive 10 CONNECTED TO GPIBO 9 INSTR x Connect Interact Help 101 2j 53 Device Clear FReadSTB SYST ERR ClearHistory Options Command 1SST COMM GPIB ADDR 10 v Commands Send Command Send amp Read Instrument Session History lt Agilent Technologies L44504 My00012345 0 12 0 04 0 00 0 00 gt SYST COMM GPIB ADDR 10 Figure 2 19 Setting the GPIB Address Using the Interactive Window Once the address is changed within the instrument the address must also be changed in the Agilent Connection Expert s configuration tables L4400 User s Guide Software Installation and Configuration 2 From the Agilent Connection Expert main window highlight the instrument added and then click Change Properties Within the configurable properties window change the address of the instrument from 9 to 10 and click OK Agilent Connection Expert File Edit View Configuration Tools Help Refresh All 3 Undo 3 Properties Interactive 10 HZ Add Instrument 9 Add nterface Delete Task Guide Instrument 1 0 on this PIB Instrument L4450A Tasks for This In trur
174. f commonly used instrument functions For detailed example programs involving multiple drivers and development environments refer to the 1 4400 Product Reference CD ROM p n 34989 13601 Opening and Closing Channels Example Closing and opening channels This command closes the specified channels on the L4421A If any channel in a bank is defined to be part of the scan list and a scan is occurring attempting to close another channel including Analog Bus channels within the same bank will result in an error Channel closures in the other bank are allowed as long as no channels are part of the scan list The following commands close and open channels 13 and 15 through 18 ROUTe CLOSe 1013 1015 1018 ROUTe OPEN 1013 1015 1018 Example Closing and opening Analog Bus relays following command connects the Analog Buses to Bank 1 via the Analog Bus relays on Bank 1 ROUTe CLOSe 1911 1912 1913 1914 ROUTe OPEN 1911 1912 1913 1914 The analog bus relays numbered 1911 1912 1913 1914 the L4421A are ignored if they are included in a range of channels An error will be generated if an analog bus relay is specified as the first or last channel in a range of channels For example the following command closes all channels between channels 1 and 30 In addition this command closes analog bus relay 1911 ROUTe CLOSe 1001 1030 1911 103 4 L4421A 40 Channel Armature Multiplexer Example Querying channel
175. f this chapter L4400 User s Guide Software Installation and Configuration 2 Configuring the L4400 Instruments Instrument configuration as applied to the L4400 series of LXI instruments involves the following identifying the IP address and host name LAN programming optional setting the GPIB address testing the communication paths LAN and or GPIB to the instrument opening the Web interface to the instrument Each task listed above is accomplished using the Agilent Connection Expert Feature of the Agilent IO Libraries Suite The information included this section of the chapter is Selecting a LAN Network Connecting the LAN Cables Configuring the LAN Interface GPIB Configuration Selecting a LAN Network This user s guide defines a private isolated LAN as a network in which instrument access is limited to a direct connection between the computer and the instrument or to multiple instruments connected via a dedicated router or switch A site company wide LAN is defined as a network in which instrument access is available to many users in on site and remote locations The instrument s application and or your company s Information Technology IT department may have guidelines that help decide the type private or site of network used If a network configuration has not been determined refer to the following considerations concerning each type Private LAN Considerations Some of the basic paramete
176. female 125V for L4421A L4433A L4437A Y1141A 50 pin D sub male 125V for L4451A L4452A Y1142A 78 pin D sub male 60V for L4450A L4445A Remote Extender Modules and Distribution Boards These kits expand the number of switches and attenuators controlled by the L4445A Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver instrument Ordering Information 34945EXT External Driver Distribution Boards Y1150A Eight 181 SPDT switches Y1151A Two 87104x 106x multiport or 87406B matrix switches Y1152A One 87204x 206x or 87606B switch and two N181x switches Y1153A Two 84904 5 6 7 8 or 8494 5 6 step attenuators Y1154A Two 87222 transfer switches and six N181x SPDT switches Y1155A Generic screw terminals for driving 16 switch coils 14400 User s Guide Introduction to the 14400 Series Instruments 1 Operation and Instrument Rack Mounting The L4400 series instruments can be located on a bench top or rack mounted in standard 19 inch EIA rack cabinets Bench Top Operation Cooling and ventilation of the L4400 series instruments are through the sides of the instrument chassis When placed on the bench top ensure the sides of the instrument are not directly covered or blocked Rack Mounting The L4400 instruments are mounted in EIA rack cabinets using the Y1160A rack mount kit The kit allows you to mount one or two L4400 instruments side by side on a sliding shelf while occupying one EIA rack unit of space
177. fety Interlock errors are suppressed in this mode the actual analog bus relays affected by the Safety Interlock are disabled as long as no terminal block or cable is connected to the module 112 L4400 User s Guide L4433A Dual Quad 4x8 Reed Matrix L4433A SCPI Command Summary 14400 User s Guide Table 5 1 lists the instrument specific SCPI commands that apply to the L4433A Dual Quad 4x8 Reed Matrix Table 3 3 Chapter 3 lists the SCPI commands that apply to all L4400 series instruments For complete information on all SCPI commands refer to the Programmer s Reference contained on the L4400 Product Reference CD ROM p n 34989 13601 Table 5 1 L4433A SCPI Command Summary 5 Subsystem Commands ROUTe ROUTe CHANnel LABel CLEar MODule 1 Switch Control ROUTe CHANnel LABel DEFine lt label gt lt ch_list gt ROUTe CHANnel LABel DEFine USERIFACTory lt ch_list gt ROUTe CLOSe lt ch_list gt ROUTe CLOSe lt ch_list gt ROUTe CLOSe EXCLusive lt ch_list gt ROUTe MODule BUSY 1 ROUTe MODule WAIT 1 ROUTe MODule WAIT 1 ROUTe OPEN Q ch list ROUTe OPEN ch list ROUTe OPEN ABUS 1 4IABUS1 ABUSAIALL ROUTe OPEN ALL 1 ROUTe OPERation OVERIap ENABle OFFIOIONI1 ROUTe OPERation OVERIap ENABle ROUTe ROUTe SEQuence ABORt Sequence ROUTe SEQuence BUSY Operation ROUTe SEQuence CATalog ROUTe SEQuence DEFine lt name gt lt commands gt ROUTe SEQuenc
178. from the instruments before verification or adjustment L4451A 4 Channel Isolated DAC Module Each isolated DAC output channel can be measured and adjusted using a DMM with voltage and current measurement capability There are two ways to adjust the DACs depending upon the state of calibration security If the instrument is secured for calibration when the adjustment is begun the adjustments are considered volatile All adjustments are discarded when power is cycled This provides an easy means to make immediate temperature compensated adjustments to the DAC outputs without overwriting stored calibration constants When this type of adjustment is made the calibration count see page 251 is not advanced If the instrument is unsecured for calibration the adjustments written to non volatile calibration memory The calibration count see page 251 is advanced L4400 User s Guide 253 1L4451A and L4452A Calibration Procedures L4451A Verification The test connections for verifying the L4451A DAC output current and voltage using an external DMM are shown in Figures A 1 and A 2 Note that connections are shown for a single channel L4451A Terminal Block T CLOCK SENSE SENSE I LEX o HLTH H L H L A s 35 4 45
179. g However if remote sensing is not used do not connect loads or cables to the remote sensing terminals H Sense and L Sense When using the remote sensing feature connect sense wires from the load to the High Sense and Low Sense terminals for the desired channels Each channel can also generate current between 20 mA and 20 mA at 630 nA resolution When outputting current the High Sense and Low Sense terminals are not used and are opened For protection each channel incorporates a fuse that will open at greater than 20 mA If an overload condition exists the fuse will open but no error or SRQ will be generated To reset the fuse remove the overload condition and wait a few minutes for the fuse to cool Waveform Trace Mode Using the internal waveform point storage you can output provided sine square or ramp and triangle wave shapes or define your own wave shape with up to 512 000 points The module can output points with a settling time of 40 us and a 200 kHz point to point update rate 14400 User s Guide 14400 User s Guide L4451A 4 Channel Isolated D A Converter with Waveform Memory 9 The on board memory provides storage for you to create up to 32 voltage or current waveforms You can apply a different waveform to each channel to output Or you can apply the same waveform to more than one channel For each channel you can designate the gain frequency and or offset for its output The waveforms are stored in instrum
180. g Documentation gt 10 Libraries Suite Getting Started Agilent Connection Expert Event Viewer e JG e eue ty 2 82 Interactive IO F ViFind32 debug utility VISA Assistant Agilent VISA Options Documentation Installation Information IO Config Information Clicking the icon opens the pop up menu Hide Agilent IO Control Exit About Agilent IO Control Figure 2 5 Starting Agilent Connection Expert Locating the Instruments Agilent Connection Expert opens with a welcome screen and window similar to that shown in Figure 2 6 The computer interfaces configured during installation of the Agilent IO Libraries are displayed in the left column Explorer pane and the properties of the configured interface and instrument are displayed in the right column Properties pane 22 L4400 User s Guide Software Installation and Configuration Agilent Connection Expert File Edit view I O Configuration Tools Help Refresh All y Und 3 Properties ig Interactive 10 Add Instrument m Add Interface x Delete Refresh All 99 COMI ASRL1 99 ASRL2 99 i This item has been verified Change Properties 99 useo lt lt Properties pane Agilent VISA is the primary VISA library Figure 2 6 Agilent Connection Expert ACE Opening Window To search the network for instruments click on Add
181. ge or the lowest range that can measure 16V do not use autorange Short the inputs to the DMM The DMM reading is the offset voltage for the selected range If the DMM has null capability turn it on at this time Otherwise record the offset which will be subtracted from the subsequent voltage measurements Unsecure the instrument for calibration using the command CALibration SECure STATe 0 code Connect channel 1 of the L4451A to the DMM as shown in Figure 2 Set the DMM to measure DC volts Refering to Table A 3 set the first DAC calibration point using the command CALibration BEGin VOLTage 1 lt channel gt For channel 1 the command is executed as CALibration BEGin VOLTage 1 091001 Measure the DAC output on the DMM Subtract the offset voltage measured in Step 2 from the reading Write this value to the DAC using the command CALibration POINt value Note the DAC output which is now calibration point 2 Table A 3 Subtract the offset voltage from the new DMM reading and write the value to the DAC as above Repeat Step 6 until the nine voltage calibration points have been entered and measured 0 is returned after the last calibration point point 9 indicating the end of the sequence Separately connect L4451A channels 2 3 and 4 to the DMM as shown in Figure 2 Repeat Steps 5 through 7 for each channel until calibration points 1 through 9 have been measured and entered L4400 User
182. gilent Technologies 127 6 L4437A General Purpose Switch General Purpose Switch Instrument 128 The L4437A General Purpose GP switch can be used to route signals or control other system devices The L4437A provides independent control of 32 latching relays Twenty eight Form C relays rated for 1 A at 60 W per channel Four Form A relays rated for 5 A at 150 W per channel The L4437A contains armature latching relays and you can use the switch for device actuation digital output or combine it with additional switch instruments to create flexible switching topologies You can close multiple channels at the same time The L4437A does not implement an analog bus temperature sensor on the instrument triggers system interrupts when high carry current induced heat on the instrument is excessive This over temperature situation generates an SRQ event when the factory set 70 C threshold is reached It is up to the user to determine what if any action should be taken Reactive loads those that include significant inductance or capacitance can cause voltage spikes or current spikes during switching operations The L4437A is designed for switching reactive loads The optional 34937T terminal block has solder pads for adding snubber circuits for the 5 A relays to reduce the reactive transients See the drawings on page 134 for the locations of snubber circuit pads and installation information about a snubber circuit A hardware
183. gure the L4451A to output the currents listed in Table A 2 For each current level measured subtract the current offset recorded in Step 2 as applicable The results should be within the limits listed in Table A 2 Repeat Step 3 for L4451A channels 2 3 and 4 255 256 L4451A and 14452 Calibration Procedures Voltage Output Verification 1 With the DMM disconnected from the L4451A set the DMM to the 100V range or the lowest range that can measure 16V do not use autorange Short the inputs to the DMM The DMM reading is the offset voltage for the selected range If the DMM has null capability turn it on at this time Otherwise record the offset which will be subtracted from the subsequent voltage measurements Connect channel 1 of the L4451A as shown in Figure A 2 Configure the L4451A to output the voltages listed in Table A 2 For each voltage level measured subtract the offset voltage recorded in Step 2 as applicable The results should be within the limits listed in Table 2 4 Repeat Step 3 for L4451A channels 2 3 and 4 It is not necessary to test the voltage output at the full rated 10 mA load If you test the output using a load connect the sense terminals Table A 2 L4451A Output Current and Voltage Levels Output Current Error From Nominal 90 day 20 ma 23 HA 15 mA 18 5 10 14 5 ma 9 5 0 mA 1 5 5 9 5
184. h terminal will cause a potential shock haz ard that could result in personal injury Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere Do not operate the instrument in the pres ence of flammable gases or fumes Do Not Remove the Instrument Cover Only qualified service trained personal who are aware of the hazards involved should remove instrument covers Always disconnect the power cable and any exter nal circuits before removing the instrument cover Do Not Modify the Instrument Do not install substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification to the prod uct Return the product to an Agilent Sales and Service Office for service and repair to ensure that safety features are maintained In Case of Damage Instruments that appear damaged or defec tive should be made inoperative and secured against unintended operation until they can be repaired by qualified service personnel Safety Symbols Alternating current Frame or chassis terminal Standby supply Unit is not completely disconnected from ac mains when switch is off Caution risk of electric shock Caution refer to accompanying description If you have questions about your shipment or if you need information about warranty service or technical support contact Agilent Technologies In the United States 800 829 4444 In Europe 31 20 547 2111 In Japan 0120 421 345 Or go to ww agilent com find assist for information on contacting Agil
185. hannel BYTE default 101 102 103 104 201 202 203 204 8 bits 8 bits 8 bits 8 bits 8 bits 8 bits 8 bits 8 bits WORD 101 103 201 203 16 bits 16 bits 16 bits 16 bits LWORd 101 201 32 bits 32 bits Reading Digital Data The simplest way to read a digital channel is using the MEASure DIGital query This query sets the channel to be an input channel and sets all other channel parameters to the default settings For example sending the following SCPI command to the L4450A will read the value of the 8 bit channel 102 An unsigned integer value is returned that represents the state of the 8 bits on channel 102 MEAS DIG BYTE 1102 By adding parameters to the command you can set the channel width threshold and polarity for read For example sending the following SCPI command you can read the 32 bit channel 201 MEAS DIG LWOR 2 5 NORM 1201 L4400 User s Guide L4450A 64 Bit Digital 1 0 with Memory andCounter 8 To read digital data with more control over the channel parameters use the SCPI CONFigure and SENSe commands The CONFigure commands set up the digital I O channel parameters For example sending the following SCPI command sets 16 bit input channel 103 to use a 2 5 V input threshold and normal polarity CONF DIG WORD 2 5 NORM 1103 Once configured the data is read using the following command SENS DIG DATA WORD 1103 You may also read an individual bit using the SENSe command
186. hazard It calls attention to an operating procedure practice or the like that if not correctly per formed or adhered to could result in personal injury or death Do not proceed beyond a WARNING notice until the indicated condi tions are fully understood and met Additional Safety Notices The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of oper ation of this instrument Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warnings or instructions elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design manufacture and intended use of the instrument Agilent Technologies assumes no liability of the customer s failure to com ply with the requirements General Do not use this products in any manner not specified by the manufacturer The protec tive features of this product may be impaired if it is used in a manner not speci fied in the operation instructions Before Applying Power Verify that all safety precautions are taken Make all connections to the unit before applying power Ground the Instrument This product is provided with protective earth terminals To minimize shock hazard the instrument must be connected to the ac power mains through a grounded power cable with the ground wire firmly con nected to an electrical ground safety ground at the power outlet Any interrup tion of the protective grounding conduc tor or disconnection of the protective eart
187. he ID query parameter of the session initialization function to False the program can be ported between corresponding L4400 and 34980A instruments For example in the IVI COM programming example MultfunctionExample csproj the instrument session is opened using the function ID query address string host Initialize GPIB 9 false true standardInitOptions 4 driverSetupOptions reset By setting the ID query parameter to false as shown and changing the address string as required the example can be run using the L4452A multifunction module or the 34952A multifunction module Note that channel addresses within the program must be changed accordingly See L4400 Series Channel Addressing Scheme for more information Modifying each of the programming examples on the L4400 Product Reference CD ROM in this manner allows the examples to be used by the L4400 instruments and their 34980A counterparts Analog Bus Applications Usage L4421A 40 Channel Armature Multiplexer L4433A Dual Quad 4x8 Reed Matrix This section provides important environmental and electrical considerations that can affect analog bus usage on the L4421A and L4433A 14400 User s Guide 65 3 Operating and Programming Environmental Operating Conditions The L4400 series instruments are designed to operate in a temperature range of 0 C to 55 C with non condensing humidity The maximum humidity is 80 at 40 C or h
188. he lab Add a program alias Ignore Delete General Tasks Tasks for This inf Instrument 1 0 on this AN Instrument L4450A Refresh All EUIS ERICF01 ASRL1 S cOM2 ASRL2 GPIBO Change Properties SAL LAN TCPIPO L44504 TCPIPO 2 ME 144514 TCPIPO 192 168 1 22 99 usso Instrument Web Interface tess lt lt Figure 2 10 Configured Instruments added to LAN Network Interactive 10 The Interactive IO feature of Agilent Connection Expert allows you to interact with the instruments by sending commands and seeing the instruments responses Interactive IO can help you troubleshoot communication problems learn the instruments command set prototype commands and check the instrument s responses before writing code With Interactive IO you can choose from a menu of common commands CIDN RST TST or execute commands from the instrument s command set see Chapters 4 10 for the commands available with each instrument Figure 2 11 shows how Interactive IO is started from Agilent Connection Expert NOTE For more information on Interactive IO refer to the Agilent 10 Libraries Suite Getting Started Guide The guide is available on line by clicking on the Agilent 10 Control icon and then selecting Documentation gt 10 Libraries Suite Getting Started L4400 User s Guide Software Installation and Configuration 2 5
189. hen a specific bit pattern or bit pattern change is detected on a digital input channel or when a specific count is reached on a totalizer channel of the L4450A and L44524 These channels do not have to be part of the scan list to generate an alarm Alarms are evaluated continuously as soon as you enable them There are two alarm paths that can be configured to alert you when specific alarm conditions are encountered during a scan You can assign multiple channels to either of the two available alarms ALARm1 ALARm2 Alarm data can be stored in one of two locations depending on whether a scan is running when the alarm occurs 14400 User s Guide 14400 User s Guide Operating and Programming 3 If an alarm event occurs on a channel as it is being scanned then that channel s alarm status is stored in instrument memory as the readings are taken Each reading that is outside the specified alarm limits is logged in memory You can store at least 500 000 readings in memory during a scan You can read the contents of instrument memory at any time even during a scan Instrument memory is not cleared when you read it As alarm events are generated they are also logged in an alarm queue which is separate from instrument memory This is the only place where non scanned alarms get logged alarms generated by the digital modules Up to 20 alarms can be logged in the alarm queue If more than 20 alarm events are generated they will be lost only
190. hold These parameters are set for both the handshake lines and interrupt line bank See page 204 for details about setting these parameters Memory Output Operations For memory output operations the interrupt line is sensed and can be used to start or stop memory output operations This provides a hardware means to control the data output The SOURce DIGital INTerrupt MODE command sets how the bank will behave when using memory output The mode can be set to one of three values STARt The memory output will begin on the rising edge of the interrupt line 213 214 L4450A 64 Bit Digital 1 0 with Memory and Counter STOP The memory output is halted on the rising edge of the interrupt line GATE The interrupt line acts a a gate for the memory output The bank can output when the interrupt line is asserted and will stop when the interrupt line is de asserted When you have set the polarity and mode enable the interrupt using the SOURce DIGital INTerrupt ENABle command Memory Input Operations For memory input operations the interrupt line is an output and is set on a pattern match or when the memory has been filled You can set the interrupt line to be driven or open collector using the SENSe DIGital HANDshake DRIVe command The settings for drive mode output drive level and input threshold also apply to the bank s handshake lines When set to ACTive the interrupt line will be driven by the instrumen
191. ify a scan count which sets the number of external pulses the instrument will accept before terminating the scan See Trigger Count for more information If the instrument receives an external trigger before it is ready to accept one it will buffer one trigger and then ignore any additional triggers received no error is generated All readings from the scan are stored in volatile memory Readings accumulate in memory until the scan is terminated until the scan count is reached or until you abort the scan Mx B scaling and alarm limits are applied to measurements during the scan and all data is stored in volatile memory The following program segment configures the instrument for an external scan TRIG SOURCE EXT Select external mode TRIG COUNT 2 Sweep the scan list 2 times INIT Initiate the scan Note To stop scan send the ABORt command Trigger Count L4400 User s Guide Usage L4421A 40 Channel Armature Multiplexer L4450A 64 Bit Digital I O digital input counter channels only L4452A Multifunction Module digital input totalizer channels only You can specify the number of triggers that will be accepted by an instrument before returning to the idle state The trigger count applies to both scanning and non scanning applications Select a trigger count between 1 and 500 000 triggers or continuous 75 3 76 Operating and Programming You can store at least 500 000 readings in memory and
192. igher Do not use in locations where conductive dust or electrolytic salt dust may be present The L4400 instruments should be operated in an indoor environment where temperature and humidity are controlled Condensation can pose a potential shock hazard Condensation can occur when the instrument is moved from a cold to a warm environment or if the temperature and or humidity of the environment changes quickly When used in pollution degree 1 conditions the maximum voltage rating for the Analog Buses is 300V When used in pollution degree 2 conditions the maximum voltage rating is 100V If conditions change ensure that condensation has evaporated and the instrument has thermally stabilized until pollution degree 1 conditions are restored before turning on power to the equipment Pollution Degree 1 No pollution or only dry non conductive pollution occurs The pollution has no influence on insulation IEC 61010 1 2nd Edition Pollution Degree 2 Normally only non conductive pollution occurs Occasionally a temporary conductivity leakage current between isolated conductors caused by condensation can be expected IEC 61010 1 2nd Edition Electrical Operating Conditions WARNING To avoid electric shock turn off the L4400 instrument and disconnect or de energize all field wiring to the modules and the Analog Bus connector before removing any module or slot cover Transients The Analog Buses are designed to safely with
193. ing the SENSe DIGital DATA FORMat command You can set the memory to be read as either LIST or BLOCk The LIST parameter default returns the data as comma separated ASCII values BLOCk returns the data in IEEE 488 block format Before you can read the data in memory you must stop the memory operations using the SENSe DIGital MEMory ENABle OFF command Read all the captured data using the SENSe DIGital MEMory DATA ALL query This performs a non destructive read of all data in the bank s memory To read specific captures use the SENSe DIGital MEMory DATA form of the command This command takes index and count parameters to specify which data to retrieve The oldest data in memory has an index of 0 The count specifies the number of samples to read count index must be less than the number of captured points Both these data reads are non destructive to the bank memory To clear the memory for new data send the SENSe DIGital MEMory CLEar command Interrupt Lines L4400 User s Guide Each bank has an interrupt line that can be used with memory input or output operations When a bank is set to input data the interrupt line is an output When a bank is set to output data the interrupt line is set to be an input You can set the polarity of the interrupt line for input and output operations using the CONFigure DIGital INTerrupt POLarity command You can configure the interrupt line drive mode output drive level and input thres
194. ist SENSe TOTalize THReshold MODE ch list SENSe TOTalize THReshold VOLTage lt voltage gt IMINIMAXIDEF lt ch_list gt SENSe TOTalize THReshold VOLTage MINIMAX lt ch_list gt SENSe TOTalize TYPE READIRRESet lt ch_list gt SENSe TOTalize TYPE lt ch_list gt SENSe DIGital DATA BYTEITIWORDI2ILWORdI4 DECi mallBINary HEXadecimallOCTal 8 ch list SENSe DIGital DATA BIT bit 8 ch list SENSe DIGital HANDshake THReshold lt voltage gt IMINIMAXIDEF ch list SENSe DIGital HANDshake THReshold MINIMAX G ch list SENSe DIGital INTerrupt ENABIe OFFIOIONI1 8 ch list SENSe DIGital INTerrupt ENABIe ch list SENSe DIGital INTerrupt MODE MFULIICOMPare Q ch list SENSe DIGital INTerrupt MODE Q ch list SENSe DIGital INTerrupt STATus Q ch list SENSe DIGital MEMory CLEar Q ch list SENSe DIGital MEMory COMPare ACTion CONTinuelSTARtISTOP ch list SENSe DIGital MEMory COMPare ACTion ch list SENSe DIGital MEMory DATA index count lt channel gt SENSe DIGital MEMory DATA ALL lt channel gt SENSe DIGital MEMory DATA FORMat LISTIBLOCk SENSe DIGital MEMory DATA FORMat SENSe DIGital MEMory DATA POINts MAX ch list SENSe DIGital MEMory ENABle OFFIOIONI1 8 ch list SENSe DIGital MEMory ENABle ch list
195. ition STATus QUEStionable ENABle lt enable_value gt STATus QUEStionable ENABle STATus QUEStionable EVENt SYSTem MODule MEMory State Storage RCL 112131415 112131415 MEMory NSTates MEMory STATe CATalog MEMory STATe DELete 112131415 MEMory STATe DELete ALL MEMory STATe NAME 112131415 lt name gt MEMory STATe NAME 112131415 MEMory STATe RECall AUTO OFFIOIONI1 MEMory STATe RECall AUTO MEMory STATe RECall SELect 112131415 MEMory STATe RECall SELect MEMory STATe VALid 112131415 14400 User s Guide Operating and Programming 3 IEEE 488 Commands CLS ESE enable value ESE ESR IDN OPC OPC RCL 112131415 RST SAV 112131415 SRE lt enable_value gt SRE STB TRG TST WAI SYSTem System Related Commands IDN RST TST SYSTem CDEScription LONG 1 SYSTem CDEScription SHORt 1 SYSTem COMMunicate ENABle OFFIOIONI1 GPIBILANISOCKetsITELNetIVXI11IWEB SYSTem COMMunicate ENABle GPIBILANISOCKetsI TELNetlVXI11lWEB SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB ADDRess lt address gt SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB ADDRess SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB ADDRess INSTalled SYSTem CPON 1 SYSTem CTYPe 1 SYSTem DATE lt yyyy gt lt mm gt lt dd gt SYSTem DATE SYSTem DELay IMMediate seconds SYSTem ERRor SYSTem LOCK OWNer SYSTem LOCK RELease SYSTem LOCK REQuest SYSTem MODule SYSTem PRESet SYSTem SECurity
196. k IP addresses available is limited By using a router with Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP capability on a private network the router can assign an IP address to each instrument thus creating a sub network subnet that does not consume site IP addresses Site LAN Considerations For applications requiring access by many users or by users at distributed sites a site LAN network is required In addition to supporting multiple users site LANs often offer the advantage of being maintained by IT departments When using a site LAN consult your IT department regarding all LAN configuration and security issues Connecting the LAN Cables LAN cables are connected to the LAN terminal on the instrument the computer and to the router or switch if they are part of your network L4400 User s Guide Software Installation and Configuration 2 Private Network Connections Figure 2 3 shows typical LAN cable connections for a private network Typical Private isolated LAN Networks Direct Connection 5 Crossover Cable Ethernet Hub Switch Router Router Switch Connection 34424444423 Pilu PC L4400 L4400 L4400 L4400 Figure 2 3 Typical Private LAN Network Connections When makinsg a direct connection between the L4400 instrument and the PC use the yello
197. lays Armature non latching i i i NOTE All series resistors shown are 1000 2 Row1 2C1 2C2 2C8 H 2C1 bypass 2C2L bypass 2C8 bypass Row 2 4 2 Row3 2 p 4 Row4 Q H i 5 Rowi NOTE Three digit channel L Row2 Q 4 numbers are derived from a L specific matrix number and the Row3 0 intersection of rows and Row4 0 4 columns on that matrix The channel shown here is 132 Matrix 1 Row 3 Column 2 Matrix 3 3C1 3c2 3C8 Channel 218 3C1 bypass 3C2 bypass 3C8 bypass Matrix 2 Row 1 Column 8 Analog Buses Rowi H ABus1 Row2 A DMM Row3 H Row4 Hl AWW Matrix 4 4C1 4C2 4C8 4C1 bypass 4C2 bypass 4C8 bypass Ty z AAN 1 i 4 2 AA XN Row3 L4 ANN Row4 124 14400 User s Guide L4433A Dual Quad 4x8 Reed Matrix 5 L4433A D Sub Connectors for One Wire Mode Matrices 1 amp 2 Matrices 3 amp 4 Matrices 1 and 2 end of the module is facing you 104 2C4 1C5 2C5 2C4 bypass bypass bypass bypass 1C7 2C7 1C4 1R4 284 1065 205 NC 1C7 2 7 bypass bypass NC For orientation the D sub connector 00000000 9 9 50 D Sub 103 2C3 1C1 2C1 1C6 2C6 Male Connectoi NC bypass bypass bypass bypass 1C2 2 2 bypass bypass 1 2 2R2 1 8 2C8 NC NC GND 6 2 9 O co e e
198. le WAIT 1 ROUTe MODule WAIT 1 ROUTe OPEN lt ch_list gt ROUTe OPEN lt ch_list gt ROUTe OPEN ABUS 1 4IABUS1 ABUSAIALL ROUTe OPEN ALL 1 ROUTe OPERation OVERlap ENABle OFFIOIONI1 ROUTe OPERation OVERlap ENABle ROUTe SEQuence ABORt ROUTe SEQuence BUSY ROUTe SEQuence CATalog ROUTe SEQuence DEFine lt name gt lt commands gt ROUTe SEQuence DEFine lt name gt ROUTe SEQuence DELete ALL ROUTe SEQuence DELete NAME lt name gt ROUTe SEQuence RUNNing NAME ROUTe SEQuence TRIGger IMMediate lt name gt ROUTe SEQuence TRIGger SOURce lt name gt MANual ROUTe SEQuence TRIGger SOURce lt name gt ROUTe SEQuence WAIT SENSe Temperature Sensing SENSe TEMPerature TRANsducer T Couple RJUNction INTer nal SYSTem SYSTem ABUS INTerlock SIMulate OFFIOIONI1 SYSTem ABUS INTerlock SIMulate L4400 User s Guide L4421A 40 Channel Armature Multiplexer 4 TRIGger TRIGger COUNt lt count gt IMINIMAXIDEFIINFinity Triggering TRIGger COUNt MINIMAX Commands TRIGger DELay AUTO OFFIOIONI1 TRIGger DELay AUTO TRIGger SOURce IMMediatelBUSIEXTernallTIMer TRIGger SOURce TRIGger TIMer lt seconds gt IMINIMAXIDEF TRIGger TIMer MINIMAX DIAGnostic DIAGnostic RELay CYCLes Q ch list DIAGnostic RELay CYCLes CLEar ch list L4421A Example Program Segments L4400 User s Guide The following sections contain example program segments o
199. les that connect to the analog bus are interlock protected This means that when an installed module is exposed no terminal block or cable is connected the analog bus relays are open and disconnected from the analog buses See page 100 for further information The 34921T is the only terminal block that provides an isothermal block with temperature reference for thermocouple measurements The temperature sensor is located on the bottom side of the PC board as shown below Also shown are two holes that you can use for connecting an external temperature reference to the terminal block Temperature Sensor Reference AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA 34921T viewed from bottom side CAUTION When wiring the terminal block via cables to the mainframe make sure the cables are connected to the correct connector The cables provide communication and power to the temperature sensor on the 34921 terminal block If cabling is not correct an error may occur indicating that the L4421A module is not fully operational 108 L4400 User s Guide ooooooooooOoO0Q ul I fe PR ME 1 L oooooooooooO0Q 42 e L AMP41 oooooooooooQ E 1212 24 25 27 28 29 30 Warning the insulation of th
200. lizer 10 L4452A Example Program Segments 14400 User s Guide The following sections contain example program segments of commonly used instrument functions The slot and channel addressing scheme used in these examples follow the form lccc where is the channel number For information on specific configurations refer to the simplified schematic on page 243 For detailed example programs involving multiple drivers and development environments refer to the the L4400 Product Reference CD ROM p n 34989 13601 Digital Input Output Example Configuring aDIO channel The following program segment configures channel 1 on the DAC as an output and then reads the output value the channel is not reconfigured as an input Then the channel is reconfigured as an input and the value is read again The second command below returns 64 as it is physically reading the output data SOURce DIGital DATA BYTE 64 1001 SENSe DIGital DATA BIT 0 1001 The second command below returns whatever is being input externally CONFigure DIGital STATe INPut 1001 SENSe DIGital DATA BIT 0 1001 Totalizer Example Reading totalizer channel count The following command reads the count on totalizer channel 5 SENSe TOTalize DATA 01005 Example Configuring the totalizer reset mode To configure the totalizer reset mode send either of the following commands The following command configures totalizer channel 5 to be read without
201. ls involved in the channel width Alarms are evaluated continuously on the digital modules but alarm data is stored in reading memory only during a scan Each time you start a new scan the instrument clears all readings including alarm data stored in reading memory from the previous scan However alarm data stored in the alarm queue from the digital modules is not cleared Therefore although the contents of reading memory are always from the most recent scan the alarm queue may contain data that occurred during previous scans or while the instrument was not scanning To assign the alarm number to report any alarm conditions on the specified digital input channels use the following command OUTPut ALARm 1 2 SOURce G ch list To configure alarms on the specified digital input channel use the following commands also see the example below CALCulate COMPare TYPE EQUal NEQual Ge ch list COMPare DATA data G8 ch list COMPare MASK mask 8 ch list Select EQUal to generate an alarm when the data read from the port is equal to CALC COMP DATA after being masked by CALC COMP MASK Select NEQual not equal to generate an alarm when the data read from the port is not equal to CALC COMP DATA after being masked by CALC COMP MASK 14400 User s Guide Operating and Programming 3 Use CALC COMP MASK to designate the don t care bits Bits that you set to 0 in the mask are ignored To e
202. mand allows you to specify whether the drive current when present should be applied to the switches or not You can set OFF INTernal and EXTernal for the default The RST command forces a re evaluation of all connected remote modules followed by setting all channels to their default states This is very similar in operation to what occurs at power up ROUTe RMODule BANK PRESet This command sets a bank to default values that vary according to which distribution board is attached The following table shows the default states set by ROUTe RMODule BANK PRESet Y1150A Y1151A Y1152A Y1153A Y1154A Y1155A ROUT CHAN DRIV PULS MODE ON ON ON ON ON ON ROUT CHAN DRIV PULS WIDT 15 ms 15 ms 15 ms 15 ms 15 ms 15 ms ROUT CHAN PAIR MODE ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ROUT CHAN DRIV TIME REC 05 05 05 05 05 05 ROUT CHAN DRIV TIME SETT 05 05 05 05 05 05 ROUT CHAN VER ENAB OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ROUT CHAN VER POL NORM NORM INV INV NORM NORM ROUT RMOD BANK DRIV MODE OCOL OCOL OCOL OCOL OCOL OCOL ROUT RMOD BANK LED DRIV ON ON ON ON ON ON L4400 User s Guide 153 7 Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver ROUT RMOD BANK LED LEV 0 005A 0 005A 0 005 A 0 005 A 0 005 A 0 005 A ROUT CHAN DRIV CLOS DEF OFF OFF except ON OFF OFF OFF channel 7 17 ROUT CHAN DRIV OPEN DEF ON ON except OFF ON ON ON channel 7 17 154 This command uses special channel addressing as described in Remote Module Identifiers on page 145 This command requires the channel dri
203. mming Once the Visual Basic environment opens start the program using the Start arrow shown in Figure 3 9 The program prompts you for the instrument address as shown agt34952A_VISACOM Microsoft Visual Basic run File Edit View Project Format Debug Run Query Diagram Tools Add Ins Window Help e d M 5 Ln 1 Col 1 agt34952A_VISACOM frm34952A Code Option Explicit LOL PTPP PP PP PP PP PP Pt Pt Pt Pt Pt Pt re Pt Pt PP re ee re ee ee ee TE FE FE PP FP PP PP PP PP PP PP PP PP PP PP PP PP PP PP PP PP PP PE pr PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE E Start arrow Set address and distribute ane Enter the IO address of the 14452 OK sion in any way 4 Technologies has nd Cancel plication Files i pr illustration only A i GPIB 9 INSTR h the programming d pate and debug procedures Agilent Teghnologies support engineers can help explain the functionality of Agilent Technologies software components and associated commands but they w ll not modify these samples to provide added functionality or coyistruct procedures to meet your specific needs PE PE PE E PE PE PE PE PE T Pt Pt H Pb PE PP HP PP HE HE HE HE HE HE PE PE HE HE HE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE PE TE PE PE PE TE PE PE PE PE PU B IO address dialog box Figure 3 9 Changing the Address String VIS
204. mode 128 L4433A two wire mode 124 L4437A 136 otalizer input L4452A 236 otalizer mode L4450A 222 rack mode alarms 88 ransients 3 66 rigger count 75 applicable instruments 75 rigger interval 72 rigger timer 72 L4400 User s Guide U unsecuring calibration 250 updating firmware 39 user defined labels 68 V ventilation 5 verification L4445A 155 viewing alarm data 87 VISA examples 62 VISA COM examples 62 VM Complete 83 voltmeter complete 83 L4400 User s Guide W warranty 2 Web interface 28 editing LAN settings 30 writing digital data 14450 207 Y Y113xA cables 4 Y114xA connectors 4 Y1150A distribution board L4445A 161 Y1151A distribution board L4445A 165 1152 distribution board L4445A 170 Y1153A distribution board L4445A 175 Y1154A distribution board L4445A 180 Y1155A distribution board 14445 185 Index 269
205. mode in use Since there are only three handshake lines per bank the SCPI handshake commands are only valid for the first channel in a bank Once handshaking is enabled it applies to the width of the first channel in the bank The three handshaking lines on each bank also differ slightly if you are using buffered see page 210 or unbuffered I O operations You can also perform unbuffered operations without any handshake The function of each line for each mode of operation is defined in the table below HO H1 H2 Unbuffered Synchronous Direction output Strobe output Not Used Hi Z Input Unbuffered Synchronous Direction output Strobe output Not Used Hi Z Output Buffered Synchronous Input Start Stop output Not Used Hi Z Input Strobe input Buffered Synchronous Output Start Stop output Strobe output Not Used Hi Z internal clock Buffered Synchronous Output Start Stop output Not Used Hi Z Output Strobe external clock input 14400 User s Guide 203 204 L4450A 64 Bit Digital 1 0 with Memory and Counter The following handshake command sets the synchronous handshaking mode for the channels in bank 1 CONF DIG HAND SYNC 1101 This form of the handshaking command also allows you to optionally set the input threshold output drive level and polarity of all the handshake lines For example the following command sets bank 2 to use synchronous handshaking with an input threshold of 2 5 V an
206. n DAC channels 1 and 2 The external clock input is shared between these two channels The second command sets the clock divisor to 100 on the same DAC channels the external clock input signal is divided by 100 SOURce FUNCtion CLOCk SOURce EXTernal 1001 1002 SOURCe FUNCtion CLOCk EXTernal DIVisor 100 1001 1002 Example Outputting aclock The following commands set the clock output frequency to 5 kHz and enable the output SOURce MODule CLOCK FREQuency 5 3 1 SOURce MODule CLOCK STATE ON 1 External Trigger Example Selecting the external trigger source and issuing trigger source The following command segment enables the trigger output mode and then enables the external trigger source on DAC channels 1 and 2 The last command issues an external trigger pulse from the module SOURce MODule TRIGger OUTPut 1 SOURce FUNCtion TRIGger SOURce EXTernal 91001 1002 SOURCe MODule TRIGger EXTernal IMMediate 1 Configuring a DAC Module Example Querying the system for module identify all modules following command returns the identify of the L4451A instrument SYSTem CTYPe 1 Example Resetting the module s to power on state following command resets the instrument SYST CPON 1 Using this command will erase any downloaded waveforms 230 L4400 User s Guide L4451A 4 Channel Isolated D A Converter with Waveform Memory L4451A Simplified Block Diagrams The following diagram shows how the module is g
207. n a module can handle It is important to provide external current limiting such as fuses if the instrument inputs are connected to high energy sources CAUTION Install current limiting devices between high energy sources and the module inputs 1 Introduction to the 14400 Series Instruments Interconnection Solutions Overview Depending on your specific requirements you can connect your DUT to the L4400 LXI instrument using the following optional interconnection solutions See the L4400 series Product Data Sheets for additional information The data sheets can be located on the Web at www agilent com find L4400 Terminal Blocks Detachable terminal blocks are available for most of the L4400 series instruments and offer a flexible method for connecting external wiring 300V rated Each terminal block is customized for a specific module Ordering Information 349xxT e g 34921T 34937T etc Shielded Cables Standard cables are available for 50 pin D sub and 78 pin D sub connectors Depending on the module and your specific requirements one or two cables may be required per module Ordering Information 1135 1 5 meters 50 pin D sub 300V Y1136A 3 meters 50 pin D sub 300V Y1137A 1 5 meters 78 pin D sub 300V Y1138A 3 meters 78 pin D sub 300V Solder Cup Connector Kits These connector kits are available if you want to build your own custom cables Ordering Information 1139 50 pin D sub
208. nable the specified alarm mode send the following command CALCulate COMPare STATe ON lt ch list Example Configuring an Alarm on a Digital Input The following program segment sets the digital pattern for the L4450A and then enables the pattern comparison mode When the data read from the bank is equal to the comparison pattern an alarm is generated on Alarm 2 CALC COMP DATA WORD 1201 Set compare pattern 1111 0110 CALC COMP TYPE EQUAL 1201 Generate alarm on match OUTP ALARM2 SOUR 1201 Enable alarms CALC COMP STAT ON 1201 Enable pattern compare mode To assign the alarm number to report any alarm conditions on the specified totalizer channels use the following command OUTPut ALARm 1 2 SOURce G ch list To configure an alarm on a totalizer channel specify the desired count as the upper limit using the following command CALCulate LIMit UPPer lt count gt lt ch_ list To enable the upper limit on the specified totalizer channel use the following command CALCulate LIMit UPPer STATe ON lt ch list Viewing Stored Alarm Data 14400 User s Guide If an alarm occurs on a channel as it is being scanned then that channel s alarm status is stored in reading memory as the readings are taken As alarm events are generated they are also logged in an alarm queue which is separate from reading memory This is the only place where non scanned alarms get logged alarms generated
209. nd so on WORD output first and second byte in memory on the first handshake next two bytes in memory on the second handshake and so on LWORd output first four bytes in memory on the first handshake next four bytes in memory on the second handshake and so on Note that for WORD outputs the first byte in memory is considered the most significant byte and is output on the upper bits 15 through 8 For Lword outputs the first byte is output on bits 31 through 24 You can change the byte order reported using the FORMat BORDer command This command allows you to swap the most significant and least significant byte ordering for all data transfer operations The command is applied globally and cannot be assigned to an individual slot or channel Input Operations For input operations see page page 212 bytes are read into memory as follows BYTE input the first byte in memory was read on the first handshake the next byte in memory was read on the second handshake and so on WORD input first and second byte in memory were read on the first handshake next two bytes in memory were read on the second handshake and so on LWORd input first four bytes in memory were read on the first handshake next four bytes in memory were read on the second handshake and so on Note that for WORD inputs the first byte in memory is considered the most significant byte and was read on the upper bits 15 through 8 For Lword input
210. nection Expert as shown in Figure 2 12 The Web interface can also be opened directly from a Web browser by entering the instrument s IP address or host name in the browser s Address window L4400 User s Guide Software Installation and Configuration 2 Agilent Connection Expert File Edit View I O Configuration Tools Help Refresh Al 3 Undo Properties IWJ Interactive IO B Add Instrument W Add Interface Delete Task Guide Instrument 1 0 on this PC AN Instrument L44504 isIn Tasks for This In Refresh Al ERICF01 9 ASRL1 97 2 ASRL2 9 S S LAN TCPIPO al aes Wane a Send command L44508 TCPIPO 192 168 1 221 instO INSTR this instrument ME 144514 0 192 168 1 2 99 usso Refresh this instrument Change proper Change the lab qu Add a program Select the instrument alias Instrument web Interface open the Web interface AJ Ignore 5 _ Figure 2 12 Opening the Instrument Web Interface 14400 User s Guide 29 2 Software Installation and Configuration An example of the Web interface window is shown in Figure 2 13 F Agilent L4450A MY00012345 Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help s 2 2 JO Search 4 2 Favorites QU Media a ee m Address http 192 168 1 221 Elo 1 Support Products Agiler
211. ng commands to select the reading format FORMat READing ALARm ON FORMat READing CHANnel ON FORMat READing TIME FORMat READing TIME TYPE ABSolute RELative FORMat READing UNIT ON Non Sequential Scanning Usage L4421A 40 Channel Armature Multiplexer L4450A 64 Bit Digital I O digital input counter channels only L4452A Multifunction Module digital input totalizer channels only By default channels are scanned in ascending order If your application requires non ordered scanning of the channels in the present scan list you can use the non sequential scanning mode When sequential scanning is enabled default the channels in the scan list are placed in ascending order When sequential scanning is disabled OFF the channels remain in the order presented in the scan list Multiple occurrences of the same channel are allowed For example 91001 1001 1001 and 1010 1003 1001 1005 are valid and the channels will be scanned in the order presented L4400 User s Guide 79 3 Operating and Programming If you define a scan list with the sequential mode enabled and later disable the mode the scan list will not be reordered however the scan list will be treated as a non sequential list thereafter If you have defined a scan list with the sequential mode disabled OFF and later enable the mode the channels will be reordered Non sequential scan lists are not stored as part of the instrument state by the S
212. ng either a SYSTem RMODule RESet or ROUTe RMODule BANK PRESet command Unlike other switch modules the L4445A will always pulse a channel in response to a ROUTe OPEN or ROUTe CLOSe command For example sending ROUTe CLOSe to a channel three times in a row will result in three output pulses A single drive channel operating in pulse mode with channel verification see page 149 turned off default will report the channel as stateless and the ROUTe CLOSe query will return an error Single drive pulsed channels must have verification enabled ROUTe CHANnel VERify ON to query the channel state using the ROUTe CLOSe query L4400 User s Guide Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver 7 Long Execution Times When configuring long channel pulse drive times and or power supply recovery times be aware that the results may be long execution times For example you can set a channel pulse width of 255 ms and a recovery time of 255 ms This channel will require 510 ms to open or close If you set such parameters across all the channels on a remote module then the execution time will be over 30 seconds Be aware all channel states are driven when the remote module is reset So this lengthy execution can occur following a power RST SYSTem CPON SYSTem PRESet Or ROUTe RMODule DRIVe SOURce command Verifying Switch State L4400 User s Guide Many switches and attenuators have a built in switch position indicator This indica
213. ng the LAN Cables 18 IP Addresses and Host Names 20 Configuring the LAN Interface 21 Identifying the Instruments 27 Using the Instrument Web Interface 28 LAN Configuration Command Summary 32 GPIB Configuration 33 Firmware Updates 39 Downloading the Update Utility and Firmware 39 Instrument Power On and Default LAN Configuration States 45 LAN Reset Default Configuration 45 L4400 User s Guide 3 Operating and Programming L4400 Instrument Front Panel Overview 48 The LAN Reset Button 48 The Front Panel LEDs 48 L4400 Instrument Rear Panel Overview 50 14400 Series Channel Addressing Scheme 52 Introduction to the SCPI Command Language 52 Syntax Conventions 53 Command Separators 54 Using the MIN and MAX Parameters 54 Querying Parameter Settings 54 Specifying Channel Lists and Scan Lists 55 14400 SCPI Command Summary 55 14400 Series Programming Examples 59 Modifying IVI COM Examples 59 Modifying IVI C Examples 61 Modifying VISA and VISA COM Examples 62 Using 14400 Instruments in Agilent 34980A Applications 64 Analog Bus Applications 65 Environmental Operating Conditions 66 Electrical Operating Conditions 66 Safety Interlock 67 User Defined Channel Labels 68 Scanning Applications 69 Rules for Scanning 69 Creating the Scan List 71 Trigger Count 75 Sweep Count 76 Channel Delay 77 Reading Format 79 Non Sequential Scanning 79 Monitor Mode 80 Scanning with External Instruments 81 Alarm Limits 84
214. nk s interrupt line When using external pull ups in the open collector mode the outputs will not exceed 5 V L4400 User s Guide L4450A 64 Bit Digital 1 0 with Memory and Counter 8 Synchronous Handshake Mode In the synchronous handshake mode a strobe or clock signal is used to transfer data to or from an external device The strobe line H1 is an output and is pulsed once for each transfer Synchronous Unbuffered Inputs For synchronous handshake unbuffered inputs the HO line indicates the direction of the transfer This line is set high to indicate an input operation The HO line will remain in the high state until the L4450A direction is changed The H1 line is the strobe output line The H2 line is not used and is set to high impedance The timing of the input operation is controlled by the parameter set using the CONFigure DIGital HANDshake RATE command This setting affects strobe width memory clock rate as well as the setup and hold times Alternatively the reciprocal form of the command CONFigure DIGital HANDshake CTIMe can be used to specify the speed in terms of time instead of a rate begins when the L4450A executes of the input commands The timing should be set such that the device sending the data ensures the data lines are valid prior to time The trailing edge of the strobe line indicates the L4450A will latch the data within the time Tsgrup is 90 ns and
215. nnected to GPIBO 10 INSTR gt IDN lt Agilent Resource 0 10 1 5 Technologies L4450A MYO00012345 0 12 0 04 Figure 2 21 Connecting to GPIB Address 10 using Interactive IO Adding Additional Instruments Additional instruments are added to the GPIB configuration using the process described earlier The steps are summarized as follows and assume the GPIB cable has been con nected between the computer and the new instrument 1 Turn on the next L4400 instrument Do not turn on those instruments whose addresses still set to the default address of 9 2 Open the Agilent Configuration Expert Add Instrument window and select the instrument s GPIB address in the configurable properties window Figures 2 16 and 2 17 3 Open the Agilent Connection Expert Interactive IO window Figure 2 18 Change the instrument s GPIB address using the command SYSTem COMMunication GPIB ADDRess address 4 Change the address in the Agilent Connection Expert s configuration table to the new instrument address Figure 2 20 5 Verify the communication path to the new address 38 L4400 User s Guide Software Installation and Configuration 2 Firmware Updates Firmware updates for the L4400 series instruments consist of updates to the instrument carrier firmware and if necessary an update of the instrument module firmware The updates are made available via the Web The firmwar
216. nnection Information Update to Revision Library Interface Name 0 03 VISA Enter Machine Name IP 192 168 1 221 q INSTR enter host name or IP address The update results NOTE Please see help for further details Update Bock Figure 2 23 Entering the Instrument Host Name or IP Address When the update to the instrument carrier firmware is complete the results are indicated as shown in Figure 2 24 Note that an update of the instrument sub assembly firmware may continue for a few moments after the update results message appears Instrument sub assembly firmware updates are performed automatically if the current sub assembly firmware revision is incompatible with the updated carrier firmware L4400 User s Guide 43 2 Software Installation and Configuration Firmware Update Utility Instrument Detection and Update Connection Information Update to Revision Library Interface Name E 0 08 VISA 551 Enter Machine Name IP 192 168 1 221 zINSTR The update results The firmware update was successful NOTE Please see help for further details Update lt Back Figure 2 24 Instrument Firmware Update Complete 5 Once the carrier update AND instrument sub assembly update if one occurs complete and no instrument activity is indicated by the front panel LEDs cycle power on the instrument Once the power on sequence completes select Refresh All in the Agilent Connec
217. nt in order to be monitored The Monitor mode ignores all trigger settings and takes continuous readings on the selected channel using the IMMediate continuous source 14400 User s Guide Operating and Programming 3 The Monitor mode is automatically enabled on all channels that are part of the active scan list If you define the scan list after monitoring has already been enabled any channels that are not part of the active scan list will be ignored during the monitor operation no error is generated Mx B scaling and alarm limits are applied to the selected channel during a Monitor and all alarm data is stored in the alarm queue which will be cleared if power fails You can monitor a digital input channel or totalizer channel even if the channel is not part of the scan list The count on a totalizer channel is not reset when it is being monitored the Monitor ignores the totalizer reset mode The following command is used to enable the channel Monitor mode default ROUTe MONitor MODE CHAN The following program segment selects the channel to be monitored single channel only and enables the Monitor function ROUTE MON CHAN 1003 ROUTE MON CHAN ENABLE ON 1003 ROUTE MON STATE ON To read the monitor data from the selected channel send the following command Each reading is returned with measurement units time stamp channel number and alarm status information see Reading Format on page 79 ROUT
218. nts 24 configuring instruments 24 Interactive 10 26 locating instruments 22 Agilent 10 Libraries 14 Agilent Technical Support ii alarm port 51 alarm queue 85 alarms 84 Alarm Output connector 88 applicable instruments 84 latch mode 88 output polarity 88 rules 85 scanning on alarm 74 track mode 88 viewing stored data 87 Alarms connector 88 analog bus applications 65 analog bus port alarms usage 51 description 50 Ext Trig usage 51 signal definitions 50 analog output L4452A 236 analog output adjustments L4451A 257 analog output verification test L4400 User s Guide L4451A 255 applicable instruments 96 applying power 11 48 bench top operation 5 buffered input L4450A 218 buffered output L4450A 216 byte ordering L4450A 220 cables 4 calibration aborting 253 applicable instruments 98 recommended test equipment 249 calibration count 252 calibration interval L4451A L4452A 248 calibration message 252 calibration procedure L4451A 253 L4452A 261 calibration procedures L4451A and L4452A 248 calibration security 249 calibration security code 250 calibration services 248 calibration time L4451A and L4452A 249 changing the GPIB address 35 channel addressing 52 channel advance 83 channel closed 83 channel delay 77 applicable instruments 77 channel drive voltage L4450A 208 channel labels 68 channel lists 55 channel numbering 52
219. ocedures A 4 Connect channel 6 of the L4452A to the DMM as shown in Figure A 3 Set the DMM to measure DC volts Set the first DAC calibration point using the command CALibration BEGin VOLTage 1 lt channel gt For channel 6 the command is executed as CALibration BEGin VOLTage 1 1006 Measure the DAC output on the DMM Subtract the offset voltage measured in Step 2 from the reading Write the result to the DAC using the command CALibration POINt lt value gt Note the DAC output which is now calibration point 2 Subtract the offset voltage from the new DMM reading and write the value to the DAC using CALibration POINt lt value gt Connect channel 7 of the L4452A to the DMM as shown in Figure A 3 Repeat Steps 5 and 6 for channel 7 263 14451 and L4452A Calibration Procedures THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK 264 L4400 User s Guide Numerics 34921T external reference 110 temperature sensor 110 terminal block 110 34945EXT bank numbering 149 description 144 dimensions 193 external power 144 external power connections 148 maximum number 144 power consumption 148 remote module identifiers 151 34950T terminal block 227 34951T terminal block 233 34952T terminal block 245 A aborting a calibration 253 absolute reading format 79 address string GPIB 35 addresses IP 20 addressing channel scheme 52 Agilent calibration services 248 Agilent Connection Expert adding instrume
220. ode 123 L4433A one wire mode 127 L4437A 135 L4450A 224 L4451A 232 L4452A 244 lt lt lt lt lt lt editing LAN settings 30 electrical operating conditions 3 66 environmental operating conditions 2 66 error queue 97 example programs 59 L4421A 105 14433 116 L4437A 133 L4445A 194 L4451A 228 L4452A 241 examples IVI C 61 IVI COM NET 59 L4400 and 34980A 64 porting to other instruments 65 VISA and VISA COM 62 Visual Basic 6 0 61 Visual Basic NET 60 execution times L4445A 155 Ext Trig connector 75 Ext Trig port 51 external DMM 83 external pullups L4450A 208 external reference 110 external scanning 75 82 applicable instruments 81 connections 81 266 F firmware updates 39 downloads 39 installation 40 update utility 39 utility installation 39 format reading 79 frequency measurements L4450A 223 front panel LEDs 48 front panel overview 48 G global error queue 97 GPIB adding additional instruments 38 adding instruments to the configuration 34 address string 35 changing the address 35 using Agilent Connection Expert 33 verifying communication 35 GPIB cables connecting 33 GPIB configuration 33 grounding requirements ii handshake line drive mode L4450A 210 handshake line output voltage level L4450A 210 handshake line polarity L4450A 210 handshake line threshold L4450A 210 handshake sequence 82 handshaking L4450A
221. ode In this mode the corresponding output line is asserted only when a reading crosses a limit and remains outside the limit When a reading returns to within limits the output line is automatically cleared You can manually clear the output lines at any time even during a scan and the alarm data in memory is not cleared however data is cleared when you initiate a new scan The alarm outputs are also cleared when you initiate a new scan You can control the slope of the pulse from the alarm outputs the selected configuration is used for both outputs In the falling edge mode OV TTL low indicates an alarm In the rising edge mode 5V TTL high indicates an alarm A Factory Reset RST command will reset the slope to falling edge Note Changing the slope of the output lines may cause the lines to change state L4400 User s Guide Operating and Programming 3 To clear the specified output line or to clear both lines use one of the following commands OUTPUT ALARM2 CLEAR Clear alarm output line 2 OUTPUT ALARM CLEAR ALL Clear both alarm outputs To select the output configuration for the output lines use the following command OUTPut ALARm MODE LATCh TRACk To configure the slope of the output lines use the following command OUTPut ALARm SLOPe NEGative POSitive Using Sequences 14400 User s Guide Usage All L4400 Series Instruments This section gives information on defining and executing a sequen
222. on in Chapter 2 for a listing of the default settings The Front Panel LEDs The front panel LEDs ATTN LAN PWR provide information on the status of the instrument Table 3 1 lists the instrument s status conditions based on the color and functioning of the LEDs 48 L4400 User s Guide 14400 User s Guide Operating and Programming Table 3 1 L4400 LED Definitions and Instrument Status 3 LED Color Condition ATTN Off Instrument is not turned on and may or may LAN Off not be connected to line power PWR Off ATTN flashing Power on boot up ATTN and LAN will flash LAN flashing red and then green during the power on PWR Green self test ATTN Off LAN connection LAN Green instrument has an IP address PWR Green ATTN Off Instrument identification Activated from LAN Green flashing instrument Web interface PWR Green ON Turn on Front Panel Interface Indicator OFF Turn off Front Panel Interface Indicator ATTN Off No LAN connection due to LAN Red disconnected LAN cable PWR Green failure to acquire an IP address waiting for DHCP assigned address ATTN Red flashing Instrument programming error or self test LAN Green error Error queue is read using PNE orgen SYSTem ERRor ATTN Green flashing Instrument Busy State LAN Green firmware download PWR Green lengthy instrument operation in progress 49 3 Operating and Programming L4400 Instrument Rear Panel Overview
223. other sequence but may not invoke itself recursively In addition the number of invocations is limited to four levels of nesting and this is enforced at the time of execution Exceeding the limit will abort the sequence and an error will be generated You can also execute a sequence when an alarm condition is reached See Executing a Sequence on an Alarm Condition on page 94 for more information While a scan is running see Scanning Applications on page 69 the instrument prevents use of all channels in banks that contain one or more channels in the specified scan list these channels are dedicated to the scan Therefore if a sequence attempts to operate a channel in a scanned bank an error is generated and the entire sequence will be discarded The following command executes a sequence named MYSEQ_1 which closes several channels on the module and opens a single channel ROUT SEQ DEF MYSEO 1 ROUT CLOS 1001 1009 OPEN 1011 ROUT SEQ TRIG MYSEQ 1 Executing a Sequence on an Alarm Condition After you have defined a valid sequence you can configure the instrument to execute a sequence when a reading crosses an alarm limit on a channel The specified sequence will execute once when an alarm occurs on the specified alarm If the specified sequence name is not currently stored in memory an error will be generated For more information on configuring alarms see Alarm Limits on page S4 Assigning a sequence
224. owever the channel must be configured for a measurement in order to be monitored Allreadings from the scan are stored in the instrument s volatile memory Readings accumulate in memory until the scan is terminated until the trigger count is reached or until you abort the scan You can specify a trigger count which sets the number of scan trigger commands that will be accepted before terminating the scan See Trigger Count on page 75 for more information Mx B scaling and alarm limits are applied to measurements during a manual scanning operation and all data is stored in volatile memory The following program segment configures the instrument to continuously scan when an alarm is detected TRIG SOURCE ALARM1 Select alarm configuration TRIG SOURCE ALARM CONT Select continuous scan mode CALC LIM UPPER 10 25 01003 Set upper alarm limit CALC LIM UPPER STATE ON 01003 Enable alarms OUTPUT ALARM1 SOURCE 1003 Report alarms on Alarm 1 ROUT MON CHAN 1003 Select monitor channel ROUT CHAN ENABLE ON 1003 Enable monitoring on channel ROUT MON STATE Enable monitor mode INIT Initiate the scan 14400 User s Guide Operating and Programming 3 Note To stop a scan send the ABORt command Externally Triggering a Scan In this configuration the instrument sweeps through the scan list once each time a low going TTL pulse is received on the rear panel Ext Trig Input line pin 6 You can spec
225. owing command returns a 1 true or 0 false state of channel 204 ROUTe CLOSe 1204 ROUTe CLOSe 01204 Returns 1 ROUTe OPEN 01204 Returns 0 Example Querying the system for module Identify following command returns the identity of the L4433A SYSTem CTYPe 1 For the L4433A the query response may include a suffix to indicate a 1 wire configuration For example the response for the L4433A will be either L4433A 2 wire mode or L4433A 1W 1 wire mode Reading Cycle Count and Resetting the Power On State Example Reading the cycle count for a relay The following command returns the cycle count on channels 304 and 308 DIAGnostic RELay CYCLes 01304 1308 Example Resetting the power on state The following command sets the L4433A to its power on state SYSTem CPON 1 Linking Multiple L4433A Instruments 116 You can link multiple L4433A instruments to form a larger matrix The following two drawings show two module connections through rows and columns You can connect rows in separate instruments using external wiring Or using Bank 2 matrices you can connect through the analog busses For a clear idea of how matrices are arranged and their connections to the analog busses see the simplified schematics later in this chapter You must use external wiring whenever you connect rows in Matrix 1 of separate modules rows in Matrix 1 to rows in Matrix 2 on the same or separate modules
226. p 2 from the reading Write this value to the DAC using the command CALibration POINt lt value gt measured current in Amps Note the DAC output which is now calibration point 2 Table A 3 Subtract the offset voltage from the new DMM reading and write the value to the DAC as above Repeat Step 6 until the 13 curent calibration points have been entered and measured 0 is returned after the last calibration point point 13 indicating the end of the sequence Separately connect L4451A channels 2 3 and 4 to the DMM as shown in Figure A 1 Repeat Steps 5 through 7 for each channel until calibration points 1 through 13 have been measured and entered Table A 4 L4451A DAC Current Calibration Points Calibration Point Minimum Maximum Result Expected Value Expected Value 1 2 0 mA 2 0 mA 2 10 0 mA 8 0 mA 3 10 9 mA 8 0 mA 4 11 5 mA 9 5 mA 5 8 0 mA 10 9 mA 6 9 0 mA 11 0 mA 7 9 5 mA 11 5 mA 8 22 0 mA 16 0 mA 9 22 0 mA 16 0 mA 10 22 0 mA 16 0 mA 11 16 0 mA 22 0 mA 12 16 0 mA 22 0 mA 13 16 0 22 0 Current calibration constants for the channel are saved non volatile memory after completion of this step 14400 User s Guide L4451A and 14452 Calibration Procedures L4452A Multifunction Module Verification and calibration of the L4452A Multifunction Module is limited to channels 6 and 7 which are the DAC voltage output channels
227. p count in conjunction with a trigger count and a sample count The three parameters operate independent of one another and the total number of readings returned will be the product of the three parameters You can store at least 500 000 readings in memory and all readings are automatically time stamped If memory overflows the new readings will overwrite the first oldest readings stored the most recent readings are always preserved The CONFigure and MEASure commands automatically set the sweep count to 1 sweep The instrument sets the sweep count to 1 after a Factory Reset RST command An Instrument Preset SYSTem PRESet command or Card Reset SYSTem command does not change the setting The following command sets the sweep count SWEep COUNt Channel Delay L4400 User s Guide Usage L4421A 40 Channel Armature Multiplexer You can control the pacing of a scan sweep by inserting a delay between the L4421A channels in the scan list useful for high impedance or high capacitance circuits The delay occurs following relay closure and any inherent settling time and before the generation of the channel closed signal that would externally trigger a separate DMM see Scanning with External Instruments 71 3 Operating and Programming Scan List N Channel Delay 0 to 60 seconds Figure 3 12 Channel Delay You can set the channel delay to any val
228. parameters designed to support the type of switches intended to be present These defaults are described in more detail on page 152 Additionally the drive current source must be selected and configured The following commands show a simple sequence controlling channel 1 of an Agilent N1810 switch installed on a Y1150A distribution board of the third remote module attached to a L4445A rem 3 channel 01 Note that ALL 34945EXT modules are reset by the first command shown SYST RMOD RES 1 ROUT RMOD BANK PRESET BANK1 1300 ROUT CHAN DRIV CLOS DEF 01301 ROUT RMOD DRIV SOUR INT 1300 ROUT OPEN 1301 lt other commands gt ROUT CLOS 1301 In the example above the SYSTem RMODule RESet command resets the module and disables all drive currents The next command loads the factory default settings for the distribution board Y1150A used to support the Agilent N1810 switch The default state of switch closed is then configured When the drive source is set to internal third remote module only the switch assumes its default closed state The configured switch may now be controlled using the ROUTe OPEN and ROUTe CLOSe commands You must turn off the channel drive before sending the ROUTe RMODule BANK PRESet command Once configured turn the channel drive back on ROUTe RMODule DRIVe SOURce IMMediate These commands and settings are described in more detail later in this chapter and in the Programme
229. pen Collector Drive L Y The drive mode is set on a per bank basis using the ROUTe RMODule BANK DRIVe MODE command 145 7 146 Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver Using Single Drive Switches and Attenuators Some microwave switches require a single drive With single drive devices the channel numbering is not consecutive across all channels in a bank refer to the channel numbering description on page 143 L4445A can provide single drive devices with either pulsed or continuous drive current Settings and parameters for continuous drive mode are given in the next section Continuous Drive Current Driving non latching devices requires a power supply capable of handling sustained high current requirements You may only use continuous drive current with channel configured for single drive Additionally to prevent power supply loading care must be taken when operating more than one continuous drive at a time The actual drive may be configured as either TTL or open collector operation Using Continuous Drive The diagram below illustrates the continuous drive signals for two channels switches and the relationship of the drive parameters to the power supply requirements lt q T Setttle rr y P I T Recovery p gt Drive Ch 1 Drive Ch2 1 Start Drive Start Drive Channel 1 Position Channel 1 Channel 2 Indicators Evaluated As shown in the diagram the drive sign
230. quence Operation ROUTe CHANnel DELay lt seconds gt IMINIMAXIDEF lt ch_list gt ROUTe CHANnel DELay MINIMAX lt ch_list gt ROUTe CHANnel DELay AUTO OFFIOIONI1 lt ch_list gt ROUTe CHANnel DELay AUTO Q ch list ROUTe SCAN Q scan list ROUTe SCAN ROUTe SCAN ADD Q ch list ROUTe SCAN REMove Q ch list ROUTe SCAN ORDered OFFIOIONI1 ROUTe SCAN ORDered ROUTe SCAN SIZE ROUTe CHANnel LABel CLEar MODule 1 ROUTe CHANnel LABel DEFine lt label gt Q ch list ROUTe CHANnel LABel DEFine USERIFACTory Q ch list ROUTe SEQuence CATalog ROUTe SEQuence DEFine name lt commands gt ROUTe SEQuence DEFine lt name gt ROUTe SEQuence DELete ALL ROUTe SEQuence DELete NAME lt name gt ROUTe SEQuence DONE ROUTe SEQuence TRIGger IMMediate lt name gt ROUTe SEQuence TRIGger SOURce lt name gt ALARm1IALARm2IMANual ROUTe SEQuence TRIGger SOURce name ROUTe SEQuence WAIT FORMat Scanning FORMat BORDer NORMallSWAPped FORMat BORDer FORMat READing ALARm OFFIOIONI1 FORMat READing ALARm FORMat READing CHANnel OFFIOIONI1 FORMat READing CHANnel FORMat READing TIME OFFIOIONI1 FORMat READing TIME FORMat READing TIME TYPE ABSolutelRELative FORMat READing TIME TYPE FORMat READing UNIT OFFIOIONI1 FORMat READing UNIT General Scanning ABORt INITitate READ lt ch_list gt SWEep Scanning SWEep COUNt lt
231. r s Reference Help file L4400 User s Guide Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver 7 Remote Module Identifiers A special channel numbering method exists for use with SCPI commands that operate one or more banks of the remote module This addressing uses a non existent channel number 00 to indicate the commands are useful for all channel in a bank or all channels on a remote module The format of this special channel list is specified as 1 lt rem gt lt 00 gt where rem is the remote module being controlled and is a single digit in the range of 1 to 8 channel is non existent channel number 00 on the remote module You may not use this special channel list in a range of channels The following commands use this form of channel addressing Refer to the Programmer s Reference Help file for more details ROUTe RMODul ROUTe RMODul ROUTe RMODul ROUTe RMODul ROUTe RMODul ROUTe RMODul ROUTe RMODul e BANK DRIVe MODE e BANK LED DRIVe ENABle e BANK LED DRIVe LEVel e BANK PREset e DRIVe LIMit e DRIVe SOURCe BOOT e DRIVe SOURce IMMediate Drive Modes L4400 User s Guide Each remote module can drive the switches and attenuators using either TTL or open collector drive methods The TTL drive mode uses a pull down resistor on the output and drives a TTL high level when asserted The open collector drive provides current path to ground when asserted H TTL Drive L Drive Active O
232. r primary communications interface The L4400 series family of instruments provide switching and multifunction test capabilites for design verification automated test and data acquisition applications The instruments include L4421A 40 Channel Armature Multiplexer Module e L4433A Dual Quad 4x8 Reed Matrix Module e L4437A 32 Channel General Purpose Switch Module e L4445A Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver Module e L4450A 64 Bit Digital I O Module with Memory and Counter L4451A 4 Channel Isolated D A Converter w Waveform Memory Module L4452A Multifunction Module This chapter contains general information on instrument environmental and electrical operating conditions instrument interconnections and rack mounting instructions The chapter also contains information on applying power Ee Agilent Technologies 1 Introduction to the 14400 Series Instruments Instrument Considerations This section lists important items and actions that can affect the operation of your modules Environmental Operating Conditions The L4400 Series LXI modules are designed to operate in a temperature range of 0 C to 55 C with non condensing humidity The maximum humidity is 80 at 40 C or higher Do not use in locations where conductive dust or electrolytic salt dust may be present The modules should be operated in an indoor environment where temperature and humidity are controlled Condensation can pose a potential shock hazar
233. re automatically set to the same input or output operation Channel settings of polarity threshold level and drive mode are unchanged when channels are combined For example consider the following command sequence CONF DIG POL NORM 1101 CONF DIG POL INV 1102 CONF DIG WIDT WORD 1101 L4400 User s Guide L4450A 64 Bit Digital 1 0 with Memory andCounter 8 This command sequence sets the first 8 bits channel 101 to normal polarity for input and output operations set the next 8 bits channel 102 to inverted polarity and then combines the bits into a 16 bit channel When this WORD channel is used the first eight bits will input or output using normal polarity but the next 8 bits will read or written using inverted polarity Threshold level and drive settings all behave in the same manner as the polarity setting described above Handshaking Handshaking provides a means to synchronize the input or output of digital data By default no handshaking is used and data is input or output as the command is executed The handshake is configured per bank The L4450A provides a synchronous strobed handshake mode You can use this mode with basic input and output operations You must use this handshake mode to use buffered I O see Buffered I O Operations on page 210 The handshake is performed using three lines on each bank The lines are labeled HO H1 and H2 The function of each line is set by the input or output
234. reduce the switching voltage and current transients inherent in reactive circuits L4437A Terminal Block L4400 User s Guide Agilent 14400 Class Instruments User s Guide 7 Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver L4445A SCPI Command Summary 136 L4445A Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver 138 Recommended Switches and Attenuators 141 Power Supplies 142 Channel Numbering 143 Simple Switch Control 144 Using Single Drive Switches and Attenuators 146 Remote Module Identifiers 145 Drive Modes 145 Using Single Drive Switches and Attenuators 146 Using Dual Drive Switches and Attenuators 147 Using Pulse Drive 148 Long Execution Times 149 Verifying Switch State 149 LED Drive 151 Default and Reset States 152 Distribution Boards 154 Y1150A 155 Y1151A 159 Y1152A 164 Y1153A 169 1154 174 Y1155A 179 Mounting the Remote Modules 187 SCPI Programming Examples 188 Ee Agilent Technologies 135 7 L4445A Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver L4445A SCPI Command Summary 136 Table 7 1 lists the instrument specific SCPI commands that apply to the L4445A Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver Instrument Table 3 3 Chapter 3 lists the SCPI commands that apply to all L4400 series instruments For complete information on all SCPI commands refer to the Programmer s Reference contained on the L4400 Product Reference CD ROM p n 34989 13601 Table 7 1 L4445A SCPI Command Summary Subsystem Commands ROUTe Switch
235. refer to the simplified schematic on page 231 For detailed example programs involving multiple drivers and development environments refer to the L4400 Product Reference CD ROM p n 34989 13601 Level Mode Example Outputting a DC voltage level This command sets the output voltage level for the specified DAC channels After setting the desired level send the OUTPut STATe command to close the corresponding output relay and enable outputs from the specified channels The following command outputs 2 5 V DC on DAC channels 1 and 2 SOURce VOLTage 2 5 1001 1002 OUTPut STATe ON 1001 1002 Example Outputting a current level This command sets the output current level on the specified channels on the DAC module After setting the desired level send the OUTPut STATe command to close the corresponding output relay and enable outputs from the specified channels The following command outputs 5 mA DAC channels 1 and 2 and closes the output relay SOURce CURRent 5E 3 1001 1002 OUTPut STATe ON 1001 1002 14400 User s Guide L4451A 4 Channel Isolated D A Converter with Waveform Memory 9 Waveform Mode Example Downloading a waveform to memory and outputting waveform from DACs The following command segment downloads a 1000 point sine waveform to memory and outputs the waveform from DAC channels 1 and 2 The trace name is TEST SINE TRACe FUNCtion 1 SINusoid TEST SINE 1000 SOURce FUNCtion TRACe TEST SINE 1001
236. resetting its count SENSe TOTalize TYPE READ 1005 The following command configures totalizer channel 5 to be reset to 0 after it is read RRESet means read and reset CONFigure TOTalize RRES 01005 241 10 14452 Multifunction Module with DIO D A and Totalizer 242 Example Configuring the totalizer for count This command configures the totalizer to count on the rising edge or falling edge of the input signal The following command configures the totalizer channel 5 to count on the negative edge falling of the input signal TOTalize SLOPe NEGative 1005 Example Clearing count on the totalizer channel This command immediately clears the count on the specified totalizer channel channel 5 TOTalize CLEAR IMMediate 01005 DAC Output Example Setting output voltage This command sets the output voltage level for the specified DAC channels The following command outputs 2 5 V DC on DAC channels 6 and 7 SOURce VOLTage 2 5 1006 1007 Querying and Resetting the L4452A Example Querying the instrument identify The following command returns the identify of the multifunction module SYSTem CTYPe 1 Example Resetting the instrument to its power on state following command resets the multifunction module to its power on state SYSTem CPON 1 L4400 User s Guide L4452A Multifunction Module with DIO D A Totalizer 10 L4452A Simplified Block Diagram User Supplied Connections
237. ription T Pin Description to 1s 3c 3 interlock 17 enable the analog bus relays which are on Matrix 3R2 27 4C7 464 bypass 4 Interlock 33 2 to close The optional 3R3 39 3C8 3 5 bypass 9 0 connect pins 34933 002 for 1 wire 3R4 5 468 30 4C5 bypass 10 1 12 18 31 32 34 terminal block shorts these 481 50 3 1 bypass 21 306 bypass 25 pnd 45 46 m for you This is 482 28 4 bypass 22 4C6 bypass 26 cature protects inadvertent apa 40 362 bypass 43 3 7 bypass 15 routing of high voltages from the analog buses to the 4R4 6 462 bypass 44 467 bypass 16 D sub connector of the 3C1 37 363 bypass 19 368 bypass 47 module 4C1 38 463 bypass 20 4C8bypass 48 L4400 User s Guide 50 Pin D Sub Male Connector 125 5 126 L4433A Dual Quad 4x8 Reed Matrix 34933T 002 Terminal Block for One Wire Mode This terminal block with screw type connections is labeled with the model number and the abbreviated module name All modules that connect to the analog bus are interlock protected This means that when an installed module is exposed no terminal block or cable is connected the analog bus relays and current channels are open and disconnected from the analog buses See page 112 for further information If you are
238. river 7 The Y1150A supports the Agilent N181x series microwave switches shown below Up to eight switches in any combination can be connected to each distribution board Agilent Switch N1810UL N1810TL N1811TL N1812UL Description Unterminated latching 3 port SPDT Terminated latching 3 port SPDT Terminated latching 4 port transfer Unterminated latching 5 port Y1150A Switch Options Supported Recommended options are shaded Option Name Option Number Frequency Range various Coil Voltage 105 115 124 DC Connector 201 Type 202 RF Performance various Drive Options 401 402 403 Description and Comments All options supported 5VDC Highest coil current requirement of all coil voltage options May limit system speed because current capacity limitations This option draws 600 mA except N1810UL 300 mA Therefore a maximum of 3 6 devices may be switched simultaneously 15VDC 24VDC required if using internal power D Sub 9 pin female Solder lugs Can use ribbon cables with the Y1150A or discrete wires with the Y1155A All options supported TTL CMOS compatible All switches on the same distribution board must use the same drive mode Position indicators required to use verification feature Current interrupts For pulsed operation current interrupts are not required May provide system switching speed improvements 14400 User s Guide 155 7 Microwave Switch Attenuator
239. rogramming 3 Usage All L4400 Series Instruments When the L4400 instrument s front panel ATTN LED is red one or more command syntax or hardware errors have been detected A record of up to 20 errors can be stored in the instrument s error queue For a complete listing of the error messages see the Programmer s Reference Help file located on the Agilent L4400 Product Reference CD ROM that ships with the instrument A special global error queue holds all power on and hardware related errors e g over temperature Safety Interlock etc Errors are retrieved in first in first out FIFO order The first error returned is the first error that was stored Errors are cleared as you read them Once you have read all of the interface specific errors the errors in the global queue are retrieved Errors are cleared as you read them When you have read all errors from the interface specific and global error queues the ATTN annunciator turns off If more than 20 errors have occurred the last error stored in the queue the most recent error is replaced with 350 Error queue overflow No additional errors are stored until you remove errors from the queue If no errors have occurred when you read the error queue the instrument responds with 0 No error The interface specific and global error queues are cleared by the CLS Clear Status command and when power is cycled The errors are also cleared when you read the
240. rs of a private LAN network to consider are security performance reliability and IP address availability L4400 User s Guide 17 2 Software Installation and Configuration Security a private network generally involves direct connections between the computer and the instruments and may include switches and routers Access to the instrument is limited to users connected directly to the private network as opposed to users on a site network that could locate and access the instrument from any location possibly disrupting tests in progress Code generation for test systems on a private network is often simplified as protection against unauthorized users may not be required Performance test systems where large amounts of data are transferred usually have faster throughput on a private network On a site network heavy and unpredictable LAN traffic lots of data affects each instrument node on the network The impact on a test system is that repeatability is difficult to achieve as latencies are difficult to account for Reliability private networks are fundamentally more reliable than site networks as they host fewer users and are less complex than site networks Private networks are isolated from conditions that could bring down crash a site network IP Address Availability Every instrument node on a LAN private or site has an IP Internet Protocol address Due to the expanding use of the internet the number of site networ
241. ructions for editing the programs based on the driver type and development environment Modifying IVI COM Examples 14400 User s Guide IVI COM examples are available for the Microsoft C NET and Visual Basic NET development environments To modify IVI COM C examples for use with with your instrument open the example in the IVI COM subdirectory for your development environment by double clicking the example name with the csproj extension 59 3 Operating and Programming C Once the development environment opens select the example source code file cs extension of the same name Locate the Initialize function and change the address string Figure 3 5 shows where the address string is changed within the source code for program MultifunctionExample sln 72 Multifunction Microsoft Visual CZ design Multifunction cs File Edit View Project Build Debug Tools Window Help iil 2 S amp Debug host Initialize En Multifunction cs Object Browser Adi 291003 4a ax lez Multifunction Output Main strina args g Setup IVI defined initialization options Solution MultfunctionExample 1 pro string standardInitOptions QueryInstrStatus false Simul 2 Multifunction References Setup driver specific initialization options E App ico AssemblyInfo cs string driverSetupOptions e Militar
242. rument carrier Turn on the instrument carrier Cc N Send the command CALibration SECure STATe OFF lt code gt to the instrument Enter ANY valid see above code This code is temporarily used to unsecure the instrument 5 Send the command CALibration SECure CODE lt new_code gt and enter the instrument s new security code Record this code for future reference L4400 User s Guide L4451A and 14452 Calibration Procedures 6 Send the command CALibration SECure STATe ON to activate the new code and secure the instrument 7 Turn off the instrument and re install the instrument sub assembly into the instrument carrier Turn on the instrument Continue with the procedures for calibrating the instrument Note that the instrument will first have to be unsecured using the new security code set in Step 5 Calibration Message The instruments allow you to store a message in calibration memory For example you can store such information as the date when the last calibration was performed the date when the next calibration is due the instrument s serial number or even the name and phone number of the person to contact for a new calibration You can record a calibration message only when the instrument is unsecured You can read the calibration message whether the instrument is secured or unsecured The calibration message may contain up to 40 characters Calibration Message Commands CALibration STRing
243. ry 0 010 1301 ROUTe CHANnel VERify ON 1301 ROUTe CHANnel DRIVe OPEN DEFault 1301 ROUTe RMODule BANK DRIVe MODE TTL BANK1 81300 ROUTe RMODule DRIVe SOURce EXT 1300 ROUT CLOSe 1301 L4400 User s Guide 14400 User s Guide Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver 7 Example Configuring a Single Drive Channel The following example illustrates the sequence of commands to configure a single drive channel with continuous drive In the example the operations are directed to channel 1 on remote module 3 The drive source must be disabled before configuring pulse or paired modes The channel is then un paired and the pulse mode disabled enables continuous drive Power supply recovery time and settling time is then set to 10 ms and 12 ms respectively Verify is then enabled The switches are set to a CLOSe default state and OCOLlector drive with an EXTernal power supply is selected The channel is closed The final query of the channel state involves querying both verified state and whether channel drive is occurring ROUTe RMODule DRIVe SOURce OFF 1300 ROUTe CHANnel DRIVe PAIRed OFF 01301 ROUTe CHANnel DRIVe PULSe MODE OFF 91301 ROUTe CHANnel DRIVe TIME SETTle 0 010 01301 ROUTe CHANnel DRIVe TIME RECovery 0 012 1301 ROUTe CHANnel VERify ON 1301 ROUTe CHANnel DRIVe CLOSe DEFault 01301 ROUTe RMOD BANK DRIVe MODE OCOLlector BANK1 91300 ROUTe RMODule DRIVe SOURce EXT 91300 ROUT
244. s This allows you to check the state of an individual bit in a channel without having to create an input mask For example the following command returns the state of bit 3 in the channel 101 byte SENS DIG DATA BIT 3 1101 The acceptable range for the bit parameter is based on the channel width as shown below e BYTE 8 bit bit can range from 0 to 7 WORD 16 bit lt bit gt can range from 0 to 15 e LWORd 82 bit lt bit gt can range from 0 to 31 The SENSe command differs from the MEASure command in that it will not change the direction input or output of the channel If the channel is configured as an output the SENSe command will return the value being driven Writing Digital Data To write digital data set the channel output parameters using the SOURce commands For example sending the following SCPI commands to a Digital I O module in slot 1 sets a 32 bit channel to use normal polarity with active drive and a set output voltage of 4 volts CONF DIG WIDT LWOR 1201 CONF DIG POL NORM 1201 SOUR DIG DRIV ACT 1201 SOUR DIG LEV 4 1201 The width and polarity parameters apply to both input and output operations 14400 User s Guide 201 202 L4450A 64 Bit Digital 1 0 with Memory and Counter You can set a channel to output in either active drive or open collector configurations When set to ACTive the module drives the digital lines for both high and lo
245. s 1 Pollution Degree 1 No pollution or only dry non conductive pollution occurs The pollution has no influence on insulation IEC 61010 1 2nd Edition Pollution Degree 2 Normally only non conductive pollution occurs Occasionally a temporary conductivity leakage current between isolated conductors caused by condensation can be expected IEC 61010 1 2nd Edition Electrical Operating Conditions L4400 User s Guide WARNING To avoid electric shock turn off the L4400 instrument and disconnect or de energize all field wiring to the instrument and to the analog bus connector if present before removing any terminal block covers Transients The L4421A L4433A and L4437A modules are designed to safely withstand occasional transient overvoltages up to 1000 Vpeak Typically these transient overvoltages result from switching inductive loads or from nearby lightning strikes The lightning caused transient overvoltages that may occasionally occur on mains power outlets may be as high as 2500 Vpeak The L4445A L4450A L4451A and L4452A modules are intended for only low voltage applications and should not be connected to circuits that may generate or conduct large transient voltages High Energy Sources These instruments are designed to handle inputs up to their rated currents or their rated powers whichever is less Under certain fault conditions high energy sources could provide substantially more current or power tha
246. s Guide 14400 User s Guide L4451A and L4452A Calibration Procedures A Table A 3 L4451A DAC Voltage Calibration Points Calibration Point Minimum Maximum Result Expected Value Expected Value 1 0 5V 0 5V 2 10 0V 8 0V 3 10 5V 8 5V 4 11 0V 9 0V 5 11 5V 9 5V 6 8 0V 10 0V 7 8 5 V 10 5V 8 9 0V 11 0V 9 9 5V 11 5V Voltage calibration constants for the channel are saved in non volatile memory after completion of this step Current Adjustments 1 With the DMM disconnected from the L4451A set the DMM to the 100mA range or the lowest range that can measure 20 mA do not use autorange The DMM reading is the current offset for the selected range If the DMM has null capability turn it on at this time Otherwise record the offset which will be subtracted from the subsequent current measurements Unsecure the instrument for calibration using the command CALibration SECure STATe 0 code Connect channel 1 of the L4451A to the DMM as shown in Figure A 1 Set the DMM to measure DC current Refering to Table A 4 set the first DAC calibration point on channel 1 using the command CALibration BEGin CURRent 1 G channel For channel 1 the command is executed as 259 260 L4451A and L4452A Calibration Procedures CALibration BEGin CURRent 1 1001 Measure the DAC output on the DMM Subtract the current offset measured in Ste
247. s for open or close state The following command returns a 1 true or 0 false state of channel 036 ROUTe CLOSe 01036 ROUTe CLOSe 01036 Returns a 1 ROUTe OPEN 1036 Returns a 0 Example Querying the Identity of the Instrument The following command returns the identity of the L4421A SYSTem CTYPe 1 Querying and Clearing Cycle Count and Resetting Modules Example Querying the cycle count fora relay following command returns the cycle count on channels 7 and 16 DIAGnostic RELay CYCLes 1007 1016 Example Clearing the cycle countforarelay The following command resets the cycle count to zero on the channels 7 and 16 for a MUX module in slot 1 DIAGnostic RELay CYCLes CLEar 1007 1016 Example Resetting module s to power on state The following command resets the L4421A to its power on state SYSTem CPON 1 L4421A 40 Channel Armature Multiplexer Hardware Description 104 The L4421A 40 Channel Armature Multiplexer is divided into two banks with 20 latching armature switches channels 1 20 and 21 40 in each The instrument also offers four additional fused relays channels 41 44 for making AC and DC current measurements with no external shunts needed These current channels feature make before break connections to ensure continuous current flow when switching from one current channel to another The current fuses are replaceable Refer to the L4400 Service Guide for specific information about the
248. s the first byte was read on bits 31 through 24 Pattern Matching L4400 User s Guide Pattern matching can be used on input channels only Pattern matching can be done with or without handshaking When a pattern match occurs the L4450A can set an interrupt line or system alarm A pattern match can also be used to start or stop a buffered memory transfer Pattern matching is done on a per bank basis and always starts at the first channel of a bank and works up to encompass the configured width of the channel Patterns are set up and enabled using the CALCulate subsystem of SCPI commands For example the following commands set up a pattern match HFOOF and assert the interrupt line when the input pattern is equal to the match pattern 215 216 L4450A 64 Bit Digital 1 0 with Memory and Counter Counter CONF DIG WIDT WORD 1101 CALC COMP DATA HFOOF 1101 CALC COMP TYPE EQUAL 1101 SENS DIG INT MODE COMP 1101 SENS DIG INT ENAB 81101 CALC COMP STAT ON 81101 Once the pattern matching state is turned on the L4450A polls for the pattern HFOOF to appear on the data lines of channel 101 The interrupt line will be asserted when the pattern is matched In the example above the last command CALCulate COMPare STATe also sets the mainframe alarm on a pattern match You can use pattern matching to start or stop a buffered memory input transfer When the desired pattern is found the L4450A can be set to
249. sage L4400 User s Guide 14400 User s Guide L4433A Dual Quad 4x8 Reed Matrix 5 One Wire Mode To physically configure the module in 1 wire mode use the 34933T 002 terminal block or a compatible standard or custom cable If using a standard or custom cable make sure you connect interlock pins 17 and 33 on the Matrix 2 D sub connector Refer to the pinout drawing and table on page 125 In 1 wire mode the L4433A module contains four matrices 1 through 4 each with 32 1 wire crosspoint non latching reed relays organized in a 4 row by 8 column configuration Every row and column has one wire each Each crosspoint relay has a unique channel number representing the matrix and the single wire row and column that intersect to make the crosspoint For example channel 218 represents Matrix 2 row 1 and column 8 See the simplified schematic on page 124 In 1 wire mode you can close no more than 40 channels simultaneously due to power dissipation For example with one analog bus relay closed you can close up to a maximum of 39 channel relays If you try to close more than the allowed number of channels you will receive an error message You can connect any combination of inputs and outputs at the same time However only Matrix 3 and Matrix 4 in 1 wire mode of this module connect to the analog buses By closing channels 921 and 922 you can connect row 1 and row 2 respectively to the HI and LO L lines of 1 and ABus2
250. se fuses This module also contains nine armature analog bus relays channels 911 914 921 924 and 931 four on each bank that can connect the bank relays to the system analog buses and one that connects the current relays to 14400 User s Guide 14400 User s Guide L4421A 40 Channel Armature Multiplexer 4 the current I and LO L terminals of 1 Through 1 ABus2 you can connect any of the channels to a DMM for voltage or resistance measurements Refer to the simplified schematic on page 106 51 consists of three wires that are used for current and voltage measurements You cannot measure current and voltage on 1 simultaneously You can control each of the channel switches individually and thus configure the instrument in these modes two independent 20 channel 2 wire MUXes This configuration requires neither using external wiring nor connecting through the internal Analog Buses one 20 channel 4 wire MUX This configuration requires neither using external wiring nor connecting through the internal Analog Buses For 4 wire resistance measurements the instrument automatically pairs channel n on Bank 1 with channel 20 Bank 2 to provide the source and sense connections Four wire controls require execution of the ROUTe CHANnel FWIRe command or scanning a channel previously configured as 4 wire one 40 channel 2 wire MUX You must use external wiring or connect through the int
251. se ribbon cables with the Y1150A or discrete wires with the Y1155A Calibration UK6 UKS All options supported Certificate Drive Options STD Direct coil connections for open drain drive 24 TTL CMOS compatible All switches on the same distribution board must use the same drive mode T00 87406 only Solder lugs and TTL 5V CMOS compatible options combined see comments above 14400 User s Guide 159 7 Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver Y1151A Connections LED Connectors OOOO OOOO OOO LO OOO m 87104 87106 87406 Switch 960999559 2 99509996959 Connectors lt OOO LOO OO SW SW2 OOO OOOO OOO OOO OG OOOO OOOO OOO OOO OOO OOOO OO OOOO OOOO OOOO OO Y1151A Switch Connector SW1 and SW2 me ZO OOOO OOOE Lee SUME Me T Pin Use Pin Use 1 VR 2 VI 3 Path 1 4 IND 1 5 Path 2 6 IND 2 7 Path 3 8 IND 3 9 Path 4 10 IND 4 11 Path 5 12 IND5 13 Path 6 14 IND6 15 GND 16 Open All Paths VR is the Voltage source for the Relay 1 is the Voltage source the LED Indicator 160 L4400 User s Guide 14400 User s Guide Boa OO Boa OO Bou Boa OO Item Cable Type Y1151A Connector Switch Connector Cable Wiring Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver 7 00000000
252. secure it by entering the correct security code If you forget your security code you can disable the security feature by following the procedure below Calibration is secured and unsecured using the command CALibration SECure STATe lt mode gt lt code gt The security code is set to ATL4400 when the instrument is shipped from the factory The security code is stored in non volatile memory and does not change when power has been off after a Factory Reset RST command or after an Instrument Preset SYSTem PRESet command The security code may contain up to 12 alphanumeric characters The first character must be a letter but the remaining characters can be letters numbers an underscore _ You do not have to use all 12 characters but the first character must always be a letter The L4451A 4 Channel DAC has two modes of adjustment based upon the setting of the calibration security feature Additional details are described in L4451A 4 Channel Isolated DAC Module on page 253 Refer to the Programmer s Reference Help File located on the Agilent 14400 Product Reference CD ROM for complete information on the L4451A and L4452A calibration command To Unsecure the Instrument Without the Security Code unsecure the instrument and reset the security code when the current security code is unknown follow the steps below 1 Turn off power to the instrument Remove the instrument sub assembly from the inst
253. ser Defined Channel Labels 68 Scanning Applications 69 Scanning with External Instruments 81 Alarm Limits 84 Using Sequences 89 Instrument State Storage 96 Error Conditions 97 Relay Cycle Count 98 Calibration Overview 98 This chapter contains general operating and programming information applicable to multiple L4400 series instruments Ee Agilent Technologies 4 3 Operating and Programming L4400 Instrument Front Panel Overview LXI instruments within the the L4400 family consist of the instrument carrier an instrument sub assembly and if applicable a wiring terminal block The front panel of an 1 4400 instrument is shown in Figure 3 1 EL LXI 4 Jp Safety Interlock Pins See Manual A E Agilent Technologies L4421 A 40 Chan Armature Multiplexer mO Q em L7 7 Power LAN Reset Instrument carrier Instrument sub assembly Figure 3 1 L4400 Instrument Front Panel L4421A shown The only time it is necessary to remove the instrument sub assembly from the carrier is to attach a support sleeve to those sub assemblies that use a wiring terminal block Chapter 1 contains information for removing the sub assembly from the carrier and attaching the sleeve The LAN Reset Button The LAN reset button allows you reset the instrument s LAN configuration to its default state Refer to LAN Reset Default Configurati
254. stand occasional transient overvoltages up to 1000 Vpeak Typically these transient overvoltages result from switching inductive loads or from nearby lightning strikes 14400 User s Guide Operating and Programming 3 The lightning caused transient overvoltages that may occasionally occur on mains power outlets may be as high as 2500 Vpeak WARNING Do not connect the Analog Buses directly to a mains power outlet If itis necessary to measure a mains voltage or any circuit where a large inductive load may be switched you must add signal conditioning elements to reduce the potential transients before they reach the Analog Buses High Energy Sources The Analog Buses are designed to handle inputs up to their rated currents or their rated powers whichever is less Under certain fault conditions high energy sources could provide substantially more current or power than the instrument can handle It is important to provide external current limiting such as fuses if the inputs are connected to high energy sources CAUTION Install current limiting devices between high energy sources and the module inputs Safety Interlock The Safety Interlock feature prevents connections to the Analog Buses if no terminal block or properly wired cable is connected to the L4421A or L4433A Normally if you attempt to connect to the Analog Buses without a terminal block or properly wired cable connected an error is generated You can ho
255. start or stop a capture For example the following commands establish a byte pattern match on channels 101 and 201 When the pattern is found 200 samples are captured CONF DIG WIDTH BYTE 91101 1201 CALC COMP DATA BYTE 140 81101 1201 CALC COMP STAT ON 01101 1201 DIG MEM SAMP COUN 200 1101 1201 DIG MEM COMP ACT STAR 1101 1201 DIG MEM ENAB ON 1101 1201 The L4450A has two 10 MHz frequency counter totalizer measurement input channels The counters can operate in two general modes Totalizer mode and Initiated Measurement mode In the totalizer mode the counter acts as a basic totalizer In the initiated measurement mode the counter can make frequency period duty cycle and pulse width measurements Totalizer Mode Totalizer mode is the default operating mode for the counters When the counter is configured for TOTalizer mode it automatically starts running The totalized count can be read reset scanned and monitored The simplest way to take a totalizer measurement is to use the MEASure form of the command For example the following command configures the totalizer on the first bank initiates the measurement and returns the result The data is returned in a floating point format MEAS COUN TOT READ 1301 You can also reset the totalizer count by setting the parameter to RRESet For example the following command configures the totalizer on the first bank initiates the measurement and returns the res
256. sts in less than 30 minutes once the instruments are warmed up see L4451A and L4452A Performance Test Considerations Automating Calibration Procedures You can automate the complete verification and adjustment procedures outlined in this chapter You can program the instrument configurations specified for each test and then enter readback verification data into a test program and compare the results to the appropriate test limit values The instruments must be unsecured prior to initiating the calibration procedures see Calibration Security Recommended Test Equipment L4400 User s Guide The test equipment recommended for the performance verification and adjustment procedures is listed in Table A 1 If the exact instrument is not available substitute calibration standards of equivalent accuracy Table A 1 Recommended Test Equipment Application Recommended Equipment Accuracy Requirements Analog Output L4451A Agilent 34401A 34410A or 1 5 L4451A 24 hour voltage 34411A current specification Analog Output L4452A Agilent 34401A 34410A or 1 5 L4452A 24 hour voltage 34411A current specification A 249 250 L4451A and 14452 Calibration Procedures Calibration Security This feature allows you to enter a security code to prevent accidental or unauthorized adjustments of the instruments When you first receive your instrument it is secured Before you can adjust the instrument you must un
257. switch between the traces pre loaded into the bank s memory Enable the memory Enable the memory on the bank using the SOURCe DIGital MEMory ENABle command This command sets the selected trace to be the output and puts the bank in the wait for trigger state Trigger the output When the default trigger source is used the SOURce DIGital MEMory STARt command triggers the output The selected trace will be output when the handshake occurs If the trigger source has been set to one of the interrupt lines see page page 213 the output will wait for the interrupt to occur and then the handshake to occur before the trace is output 211 212 L4450A 64 Bit Digital 1 0 with Memory and Counter You can also output the trace one sample at a time on the data lines using the SOURce DIGital MEMory STEP command This command outputs one sample and then puts the memory in the stopped state The STEP command also overrides the interrupt line so it can be used to trigger a transfer even if the interrupt line is set to be the trigger source Deleting Traces You can delete traces in memory to recover the memory space Use the TRACe DELete NAME command to delete a specific trace Note that deleting a specific trace does not de fragment the memory You can delete all traces using the TRACe DELete ALL command Buffered Memory Input Each bank on the L4450A has its own memory for use in buffered transfers Changing a bank from an output to an inp
258. t The high output voltage is set for both the handshaking and interrupt line on a bank with the SOURce DIGital HANDshake LEVel command When set to OCOLlector the interrupt line will be driven low but will go to high impedance mode when in the High state The open collector mode requires external pull ups The SENSe DIGital INTerrupt MODE command sets the condition that will cause the interrupt to be asserted When set to MFUL1 the interrupt is given when the memory is full When set to COMPare the interrupt is asserted when the pattern is detected see page page 215 When either condition is removed the interrupt is de asserted The interrupt line is enabled by the SENSe DIGital INTerrupt ENABle command and the status can be checked using the SCPI Status System refer to the Programmer s Reference Help file on the LA400 Product Reference CD ROM Byte Ordering When using buffered memory operations the width of the data sets how the memory data is interpreted Changing the width of the first channel in a bank invalidates any traces stored or captured Output Operations For output operations see page 210 traces are put into memory using the TRACe DATA DIGital command L4400 User s Guide 14450 64 Bit Digital 1 0 with Memory and Counter 8 For output operations the data stored in memory is output as follows BYTE output first byte in memory on the first handshake next byte memory on the second handshake a
259. t name gt Configuration TRACe FREE lt channel gt 1 TRACe POINts lt channel gt 1 lt name gt TRACe DATA 1 lt name gt lt binary_block gt l lt value gt value lt value gt TRACe DATA DAC 1 lt name gt binary block l values value lt value gt TRACe DATA FUNCtion 1 type lt name gt points ROUTe Channel Labeling ROUTe CHANnel LABel CLEar MODule 1 ROUTe CHANnet LABel DEFine lt label gt G ch list ROUTe CHANnet LABel DEFine lt type gt ch list L4400 User s Guide 221 9 9 L4451A 4 Channel Isolated D A Converter with Waveform Memory Sequence Operation ROUTe SEQuence CATalog ROUTe SEQuence DEFine lt name gt lt commands gt ROUTe SEQuence DEFine lt name gt ROUTe SEQuence DELete ALL ROUTe SEQuence DELete NAME lt name gt ROUTe SEQuence DONE ROUTe SEQuence TRIGger IMMediate lt name gt ROUTe SEQuence TRIGger SOURce lt name gt MANual ROUTe SEQuence TRIGger SOURce lt name gt ROUTe SEQuence WAIT L4451A Example Program Segments 228 The programming examples below provide you with SCPI command examples to use for actions specific to the DAC module The slot and channel addressing scheme used in these examples follow the form 1cce where ccc is the three digit channel number Valid channels for this module are 001 004 For information on specific configurations
260. ter w Memory DACs Trace wavforms cleared L4452A Multifunction with Digital D A Totalizer DIO Ports Input Count 0 DACs 0 LAN Reset Default Configuration Pressing the LAN Reset button recessed on the L4400 instrument front or rear panel restores the instrument s default LAN configuration Table 2 4 lists the default LAN configuration settings 14400 User s Guide 45 2 Software Installation and Configuration Table 2 4 Default LAN Configuration Settings DHCP ON Automatic IP Addressing ON IP Settings if DHCP Server IP Address 169 254 44 88 default Unavailable Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 DNS Server 0 0 0 0 may be assigned by the DHCP server Host Name registered with A product number last 5 digits of serial number DDNS if available LAN Keep Alive 1800 seconds Ethernet Connection Monitoring ON instrument monitors its LAN connection will attempt to automatically reconnect if dis connected from network 46 L4400 User s Guide Agilent 14400 LXI Class C Instruments User s Guide 3 Operating and Programming L4400 Instrument Front Panel Overview 48 L4400 Instrument Rear Panel Overview 50 14400 Series Channel Addressing Scheme 52 Introduction to the 5 Command Language 52 14400 5 Command Summary 55 14400 Series Programming Examples 59 Analog Bus Applications 65 U
261. the LAN Find instrument types Advanced gt gt i Mlan L GPIB L Serial Ouse Ovx Look up hostnames recommended VISA address TCPIPO hostname net com instO INSTR Instruments discovered on the local subnet p IP Address Host Name Remote Name Identify Instrument 92 16 2 92 22 instO Test Connection Auto identify this instrument Instrument Web Interface VISA address TCPIPO 192 158 1 221 instO INSTR Identify Instrument Figure 2 8 L4400 Instrument Private LAN Connection NOTE The Find Instrument function of Agilent Connection Expert is supported only on computers that have a single LAN card installed If your computer has more than one LAN card the L4400 instruments must be entered manually using the IP addresses Adding and Configuring the Instruments To add an instrument to the network configuration select highlight the instrument host name IP address and click on OK in the Search for Instru ments on the LAN window This opens the LAN Instrument window shown in Figure 2 9 24 14400 User s Guide Software Installation and Configuration 2 E LAN Instrument L4450A hange configurable properties of this LAN device Find Instruments O Hostname IP address 192 Advanced gt gt Note serial numbdr to identify Click either to multiple instruments test connection VISA address TCP
262. the completion of the scan If you abort a scan that is running the instrument will terminate any reading in progress readings are not cleared from memory If a scan is in progress when the command is received the scan will not be completed and you cannot resume the scan from where it left off Note that if you initiate a new scan all readings are cleared from memory The Monitor mode is automatically enabled on all channels that are part of the active scan list see Monitor Mode on page 80 The present scan list is stored in volatile memory and will be lost when power is turned off or after a Factory Reset RST command Creating the Scan List Usage L4421A 40 Channel Armature Multiplexer L4450A 64 Bit Digital I O digital input counter channels only L4452A Multifunction Module digital input totalizer channels only A scan list is created as follows Use the ROUTe SCAN command to define the list of channels in the scan list To determine what channels are currently in the scan list use the ROUTe SCAN query command To add channels to the present scan list use the ROUTe SCAN ADD command To remove channels from the present scan list use the ROUTe SCAN REMove command To remove all channels from the scan list send ROUT SCAN To initiate a scan use the INITiate or READ command Each time you initiate a new scan the instrument will clear the previous set of readings from memory To stop a sc
263. the matrix and the matrix crosspoint of a row one digit and a column one digit For example channel 311 represents the crosspoint on matrix 3 at row 1 column 1 on the L4433A in 1 wire mode ROUTe CLOSe 1311 1312 1315 ROUTe OPEN 01311 1312 1315 Although the previous two examples show the same channel numbers the channels are derived differently as determined by a module s configuration mode See page 114 for channel number derivation Example Closing and opening Analog Bus relays The following command connects the analog buses to Matrix 2 2 wire mode ROUTe CLOSe 1921 1922 1923 1924 ROUTe OPEN 1921 1922 1923 1924 For 2 wire mode only Matrix 2 connects to the the analog buses In 1 wire mode only Matrix 3 and Matrix 4 connect to the analog buses The analog bus relays numbered 1921 1922 1923 1924 on the L4433A are ignored if they are included in a range of channels error will be generated if an analog bus relay is specified as the first or last channel in a range of channels For example the following command closes all valid channels between channel 1504 and channel 1708 In addition this command closes Analog Bus relay 1921 Note that although the specified range of channels includes the other Analog Bus relays they are ignored and are not closed by this command ROUTe CLOSe 01504 1708 1921 115 5 L4433A Dual Quad 4x8 Reed Matrix Example Querying channels for open or close state The foll
264. the switches on each 34945EXT module varies with the type of switches being used and the settings for those switches Some switch types consume power even in their quiescent state Be sure to review the switch data sheets for the switches you are using Setthe pulse width to the minimum necessary to activate the switch using the ROUTe CHANnel DRIVe PULSe WIDTh command Add power supply recovery time using the ROUTe CHANnel DRIVe TIMe RECovery command Use an external power supply if possible When the drive source for the master remote module is set to internal each driver interface module may supply up to 2A L4400 User s Guide Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver 7 Channel Numbering 14400 User s Guide The L4445A uses the following channel numbering scheme l lt rem gt lt channel gt where rem is the remote module being controlled and is a single digit in the range of 1 to 8 channel is the channel number on the remote module The channel number is two digits spanning channels across each remote module Channel numbers are shown below also see the figure on page 140 Bank Channels Channels Bank 1 1108 111018 Bank 2 21 to 28 31 to 38 Bank 3 41 to 48 51 to 58 Bank 4 61 to 68 71 to 78 The channel numbers are arranged to facilitate the pairing of channels for dual coil switches and attenuators Dual coil devices require the use of two channels one for each coil By pairing the upper and lower chann
265. tically used when alarms are logged on that channel If you redefine the scan list alarms are no longer evaluated on those channels during a scan but the limit values are not cleared If you decide to add a channel back to the scan list without changing the function the original limit values are restored and alarms are turned back on This makes it easy to temporarily remove a channel from the scan list without entering the alarm values again 85 3 Operating and Programming Two TTL alarm outputs are available on the rear panel Alarms connector Figure 3 4 You can use these hardware outputs to trigger external alarm lights sirens or send a TTL pulse to your control system You can also initiate a scan sweep no external wiring required when an alarm event is logged on a channel For complete details refer to Using the Alarm Output Lines on page 88 A Factory Reset RST command clears all alarm limits and turns off all alarms An Instrument Preset SYSTem PRESet command or Card Reset SYSTem CPON command does not clear the alarm limits and does not turn off alarms The channel numbering scheme for the digital input and totalizer channels is shown below Digital Input Channel Numbering Totalizer Channel Numbering L4450A 1101 through 1104 1301 1302 1201 through 1204 L4452A 1001 through 1004 1005 Pattern comparisons always start on the lowest numbered channel in the bank and extend to all channe
266. tion Expert Figure 2 10 Agilent Connection Expert may report that the instrument s configuration has changed This is represented by a yellow triangle and an exclamation point next to the updated instrument Select highlight the instrument name Select Change Properties and then click either Test Connection or Identify Instrument to update Agilent Connection Expert and then click OK Repeat for each updated instrument on the LAN and GPIB interfaces 44 L4400 User s Guide Software Installation and Configuration Instrument Power On and Default LAN Configuration States 2 The L4400 series instruments covered in this user s guide are set to their power on and preset states using any one the following commands RST SYSTem CPON 1 SYSTem PRESet Table 2 3 lists the power on and preset states for each instrument Table 2 3 L4400 Instrument Power on and Preset States L4400 Series Instrument Power on Preset States L4421A 40 Channel Armature Multiplexer All channels open L4433A Dual Quad 4x8 Reed Matrix All channels open 2 wire 1 wire mode no change L4437A 32 Channel Form A Form C General Purpose Switch All channels open L4445A Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver Channel drives enabled user defined defaults L4450A 64 Bit Digital w Memory and Counter I O ports Input Count 0 Trace memory cleared L4451A 4 Channel Isolated D A Conver
267. tom surface Figure 1 4 Installing the Shelf Install Instruments on the Shelf The L4400 instruments can be installed flush even with front edge of the shelf recessed in 50 mm increments or reverse mounted with the front of the instrument facing the back of the rack cabinet 1 Extend the shelf from the rack such that approximately 50 75 of the shelf surface is outside of the rack The tabs on the back of the shelf that run underneath the rail channel prevent the shelf from tipping 2 Determine the position of the instruments flush recessed reversed To accommodate the terminal blocks available with some of the L4400 instruments and to simplify cable routing it is recommended that the instruments be mounted flush even with the front or back edge of the shelf 3 Note the location of the four mounting holes on the bottom of the instrument Figure 1 1 Set the carrier on the shelf and align the mounting holes with the holes on the shelf Insert four MAx8 flat head screws item 1 upward through the bottom of the shelf and into the carrier mounting holes Introduction to the 14400 Series Instruments A Install the second L4400 instrument if present in the shelf area adjacent to the first instrument If only one instrument is installed install a filler panel on the front edge of the unused area Insert two M4x8 flat head screws item 1 upward through the bottom of the shelf and into the panel 5 Connect
268. tor can be used to drive LED position indicators some position indicator circuits are shown beginning on page 184 Additionally the L4445A checks the position indicators against the SCPI command last sent to provide verification of switch states By default verification is disabled and the switch state is assumed to be the last open close state driven Verification is enabled using the ROUTe CHANnel VERify ENABle command Enabling verification can cause multiple errors to be generated if the system is incorrectly configured If a switch operation appears to have failed an error is generated at the time the ROUTe CLOSe or ROUTe OPEN command is executed If you send a ROUTe CLOSe Or ROUTe OPEN command with a channel list i e multiple channels the verification is performed after all open close operations have been completed An error is generated for each channel operation that did not properly verify The verification process will affect the operation of the ROUTe CLOSe and ROUTe OPEN commands If verification is enabled these commands will check the actual hardware state of the specified channels rather than just reporting the presumed state When verification is enabled and a remote module is reset a series of errors will be consolidated and reported as one error Verification will slow switching performance on any remote module with one or more verified channels Additionally if you have enabled the command overlap function
269. ttenuator Driver 7 Y1154A Connections LED Connectors N Transfer Switch Connectors OOO OOOO VL OO COLO O Switch Connectors Y1154A Switch connector SW1 and SW2 87222 baad 290999099090901 1999990018 Pin Use Pin Use 1 VR 2 VI 3 Drive A 4 Ind A 5 Drive B 6 Ind B 7 N C 8 N C 9 GND 10 N C 11 N C 12 N C 13 N C 14 N C L4400 User s Guide 175 7 Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver Y1154A Switch connector SW3 Through SW8 N181x 0000201 1000009 Pin Use Pin Use 1 GND 2 IND B 3 N C 4 VI 5 Drive B 6 IND A 7 Drive A 8 VI 9 VR 10 N C VR is the Voltage source for the Relay Vl is the Voltage source for the LED Indicator Distribution Board Connector Switch Connector No Connection To These Pins Distribution Board Connector Switch Connector p Pint No Connection m To This Pin 176 L4400 User s Guide Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver 7 87222 Cable Item Description Example Part Numbers Cable Type
270. tus DigMemRead cpp Object Browser _tmain Vilnt32 actualLen a Solution DigMemRead 1 project l DigHemRead declare array to hold data Vilnt32 data rray 4000 more than enough room Source Files amp j DigMemRead cpp stdafx Open a session to the mainframe using the IVI C host driver Reset th anre If third parameter VI TRUE then RST happens and waveforms are dele Resource File viStatus agL44XX InitWithOptions TCPIPO0 156 140 92 11 inst0 m ReadMe txt if viStatus lt 0 fprintf stderr Failed to open t instrument 0 aer timennt ta aernnda Content change address string example source code Figure 3 7 Changing the Instrument Address String IVI C Programs Modifying VISA and VISA COM Examples Agilent VISA examples are available with the Microsoft Visual C 6 0 and Visual Basic 6 0 environments To modify VISA examples for use with with your instrument open the example in the VISA subdirectory of the development environment by double clicking the example name with the dsp extension Once the development environment opens select the example source code file extension of the same name 14400 User s Guide Locate DEFAULT LOGICAL ADDRESS and shown in the example of Figure 3 8 29 Mux_34921A Microsoft Visual C design Mux 349214 c File Edit Build Debug Tools X
271. ue between 0 seconds and 60 seconds with 1 ms resolution You can select a different delay for each channel You can select a unique delay for every channel on the module The channel delay is valid only while scanning If no channels have been assigned to the scan list the specified channel delay is ignored no error is generated The default channel delay is 0 0 seconds A Factory Reset RST command sets the channel delay to 0 0s The following command adds a 2 second channel delay to the specified channels 78 ROUT CHAN DELAY 2 1003 1013 14400 User s Guide Operating and Programming 3 Reading Format Usage L4450A 64 Bit Digital I O digital input counter channels only L4452A Multifunction Module digital input totalizer channels only During a scan the instrument automatically adds a time stamp to all readings and stores them in memory Each reading is stored with measurement units time stamp channel number and alarm status information You can specify which information you want returned with the readings The reading format applies to all readings being removed from the instrument from a scan you cannot set the format on a per channel basis The CONFigure and MEASure commands automatically turn off the units time channel and alarm information The format settings are stored in volatile memory and will be lost when power is turned off or after a Factory Reset RST command The followi
272. ule has booted the LED illuminates only intermittently during programming operations Should the L4445A encounter problems communicating with the 34945EXT the LED is continuously illuminated LED Meaning Not Illuminated Power is not applied to the module or the module is not processing commands Continuously The 34945EXT is not booted either due to Illuminated an internal error or an L4445A error Blinking Normal operation during command Intermittently transactions Send the SYSTem CTYPe RMODule query to initiate a transfer and blink the LED Always tighten the screws securing the L4445A sub assembly to the instrument carrier assembly and the screws on both ends of the D Sub cable Incorrect grounding can cause malfunctions of the modules due to electro static discharge L4400 User s Guide Recommended Switches and Attenuators Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver 7 The recommended Agilent switches and attenuators for use with the L4445A are shown below Included in the table is the distribution board used for each switch or attenuator Switch Attenuator Coil Voltage Connection Drive Options Distribution Type Board N1810UL TL Option 124 Option 201 Option 402 Y1150A N1811TL 24 Vdc D Sub 9 pin Position N1812TL female Indicators 87104A B C 24V STD STD Y1151A 16 pin Ribbon direct coil for Cable Header open drain 87106A B C 24 STD STD Y1151A SP6T 16 pin Ribbon direct coil for Cable Header open drain 87406
273. ult The totalize count is reset when the data is read L4400 User s Guide L4450A 64 Bit Digital 1 0 with Memory andCounter 8 MEAS COUN TOT RRES 91301 Totalizer counts begin as soon as the channel is configured for the totalize measurement You can stop a count by sending SENSe COUNter ABORt command and restart the count using the SENSe COUNter INITiate command The slope of the edges being counted can be configured using the SENSe COUNter SLOPe command By default when started the totalizer counts rising edges Additionally you can control when the edges are counted by setting the gate source to external and providing a gate signal on the gate input In external gate mode the counter totalizes when the gate is asserted The gate time setting controls how long the counter totalizes Once the external gate has been de asserted a new measurement must be armed via the SENSe COUNter INITiate command The figure below shows an externally gated totalizer measurement The number of totalized counts is 5 in this particular example Ext Gate x input LAMM Init Initiated Measurement Mode Measurements such as frequency period duty cycle and pulse width require an initiate command and a gate The SENSe COUNter INITiate command is used to initiate arm the measurement The measurement is gated by either an internal default or external gate source For measurements the external gate acts like an external trigger which
274. ult Gateway DHCP Server DNS Server Figure 2 14 Viewing LAN Configuration Settings from the Web Interface L4400 User s Guide Support Products A Another web enabled from Agilent Technolo Current Configuration of L4450A LXI Module Modify Configuration Currently use ON 192 168 1 221 255 255 255 0 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 1 31 2 Software Installation and Configuration Clicking Modify Configuration opens the window shown in Figure 2 15 which allows you to edit the parameters shown Agilent L4450A MY0001 2345 Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Om Pawo O A Address http 192 168 1 221 Support Products Ag Agilent Technologies 100827730 807 Configuring your L4450A LXI Module Note You must click Save before changes to parameters becorne effective Parameters marke with an asterisk also require that the instrument LAN be restarted before changes take effec Undo Edits Save RestetL4450ALAN FactoryDefauts Parameter Configured Value Edit Configuration IP Settings may be obtained automatically using the following DHCP ON OFF ON Automatic Private IP ON OFF ON IP Settings to use if automatic modes are off or servers are unavailable e IP Address 169 254 44 88 169 254 44 88 Subnet Mask
275. uments User defined channel labels are available for identification purposes only and cannot be used in place of a channel number within a command string When shipped from the factory each channel is assigned a unique factory default label cannot be overwritten From the instruments Web interfaces the factory default labels are displayed as the channel number e g 1001 1020 etc If desired you can assign the same user defined label to multiple channels within the same module or on different modules i e channel labels are not required to be unique You can specify a label with up to 18 characters You can use letters 7 numbers 0 9 and the underscore character If you specify a label with more than the allowed 18 characters it will be truncated no error is generated From the Web Interface a limited number of characters can be displayed due to space constraints in the browser window If the user defined label it too long to be displayed properly it will be truncated no error is generated All user defined channel labels are stored in non volatile memory and do not change when power has been off after a Factory Reset RST command after an Instrument Preset SYSTem PRESet command after a stored state is recalled RCL command The following command assigns label 5 PT 1 to channel in slot 1 ROUT CHAN LABEL TEST PT 1 01003 The following command clears th
276. unter totalizer measurement input channels and a programmable clock output for frequency synchronization or general clocking needs The digital channels are numbered by bank 101 through 104 and 201 through 204 for banks 1 and 2 respectively The counter totalizer channels are assigned channel numbers 301 and 302 The programmable clock is not assigned a channel number 32 Bits Counter Totalizer 1 32 Bits Counter Totalizer 2 IN Channel 24 Bits Gate e 20 MHz 10 Hz Channe 302 gt gt gt gt 201 202 203 204 199 200 L4450A 64 Bit Digital 1 0 with Memory and Counter Basic Digital 1 0 Operations Channel Numbering and Width The digital channels are numbered by bank 101 through 104 and 201 through 204 for banks 1 and 2 respectively Using SCPI commands you can group digital I O channels together to allow 16 or 32 bit operations The first and third channels on a bank can be control channels Width and direction of the memory operations are controlled by the width and direction of the first channel on the bank i e 101 or 201 In the SCPI language for the L4450A BYTE refers to 8 bit operations WORD refers to 16 bit operations and LWORd refers to 32 bit operations This diagram illustrates how the channels are numbered for each configuration Bank 1 Bank 2 C
277. urrent You can use the two analog outputs to source bias voltages to your DUT to control your analog programmable power supplies or as set points for your control systems 14400 User s Guide L4452A Multifunction Module with DIO D A Totalizer 10 L4452A SCPI Command Summary Table 10 1 lists the instrument specific SCPI commands that apply to the L4452A Multifunction Module instrument Table 3 3 Chapter 3 lists the SCPI commands that apply to all L4400 series instruments For complete information on all SCPI commands refer to the Programmer s Reference contained on the L4400 Product Reference CD ROM p n 34989 13601 Table 10 1 L4452A SCPI Command Summary Subsystem Commands CONFigure Digital 1 0 CONFigure DIGital BYTEI1 WORDI2ILWORdI4 lt voltage gt NORMalllNVerted lt ch_list gt CONFigure DIGital DIRection INPutlOIOUTPutl1 lt ch_list gt CONFigure DlIGital DIRection lt ch_list gt CONFigure DIGital WIDTh BYTEI1 WORDI2ILWORdI4 lt ch_list gt CONFigure DIGital WIDTh lt ch_list gt MEASure MEASure DiGital BYTEI1IWORDI2ILWORdI4 lt voltage gt Digital 1 0 NORMalllNVerted lt ch_list gt SENse Digital 1 0 SENSe DIGital DATA BYTEI1 WORDI2ILWORdI4 DECimal IBINaryIHEXadecimallOCTal lt ch_list gt SENSe DIGital DATA BIT bit lt ch_list gt SENSe TOTalize CLEar IMMediate lt ch_list gt SENSe TOTalize D
278. use the 34933T 001 terminal block or a compatible standard or custom cable If using a standard or custom cable make sure you connect interlock pins 17 and 33 on the Matrix 2 D sub connector Refer to the pinout drawing and table on page 121 In 2 wire mode the L4433A module contains two matrices each with 32 2 wire crosspoint non latching reed relays organized a 4 row by 8 column configuration Every row and column are made up of two wires each a high H and a low L Each crosspoint relay has a unique channel number representing the row and column that intersect to create the crosspoint For example channel 308 represents the crosspoint connection between row 3 and column 08 all columns consisting of two digits in this case the digits are 08 See the simplified schematic on page 120 You can connect any combination of inputs and outputs at the same time However only Matrix 2 in 2 wire mode of this module connects to the analog buses By closing channels 921 and 922 you can connect rows 5 and 6 respectively to the HI H and LO L lines of ABusl and ABus2 In 2 wire mode you can close no more than 20 channels simultaneously due to power dissipation However note that analog bus relays count half as much as channel relays in that total For example with one analog bus relay closed you can close up to a maximum of 19 channel relays If you try to close more than the allowed number of channels you will receive an error mes
279. using an Agilent terminal block to connect your DUT to this module be sure to use the 34933T 002 terminal block that corresponds to the 1 wire configuration mode Note that an error will not be generated if you have installed a terminal block that doesn t match the present module configuration 2 314 1121314 5 6 7 ROWS COLUMNS 100 O INRUSH 112131441121 5 415 6 7 8 ooooo 1121 sl 4 11213141 el 71 MATRIX RX 112131415 6 7 81121314 ROWS COLUMNS ON INRUSH COLUMNS INRUSH ROWS 1 21314 1 213 415 6 71 8 MATRIX MATRIX 1121314151617 841121314 OoOOOOOOO0O0000 112 3 41 5 6 7 8411121314 COLUMNS NSH Rows 1 234 5 8 7 8 2 3 4 NOTE Analog Ooooooooooooo Bus connections are on Matrix 3 and Matrix 4 oooooooooOoOQ OoOoooooooooo Warning the insulation of the wiring used with the terminal block must be rated for the highest voltage that will be present on the terminal block or on the analog bus L4400 User s Guide Agilent 14400 Class Instruments amp User s Guide e e 6 90 L4437A General Purpose Switch e General Purpose Switch Instrument 128 L4437A SCPI Command Summary 130 L4437A Example Program Segments 131 L4437A 32 Channel General Purpose Switch Hardware Description 132 97416 A
280. ut will clear all memory for that bank The general steps to use input memory are 1 Set the channel width and parameters 2 Set the handshake mode Set the number of samples to collect Start the capture Check the status of the transfer gt a c Retrieve the captured data Set the channel width and direction Use the CONFigure DIGital command to set the channel width direction thresholds and polarity See page 200 for basic input operations Set the handshake mode You must use synchronous handshaking mode Handshaking is described in more detail on page 203 Set the number of samples to collect The SENSe DIGital MEMory SAMPle COUNt command sets the number of samples to capture If you set the number of counts to infinite 0 default the bank will capture data until a STOP is received Older samples are overwritten if memory gets full Allowed sample counts depend upon the channel width as follows BYTE 8 bit 1 to 65535 WORD 16 bit 1 to 65535 LWORd 32 bit 1 to 32767 Startthe capture The SENSe DIGital MEMory STARt command sets the channel to begin the data capture The capture begins when the handshake occurs L4400 User s Guide L4450A 64 Bit Digital 1 0 with Memory and Counter 8 Check the status of the transfer You can use the SENSe DIGital MEMory DATA POINts query to return the number of samples currently in memory Retrieve the captured data Set the desired memory retrieval format us
281. ve mode can be re enabled Settings and parameters for pulsed drive mode are given on page 148 Pairing Channels With dual drive devices the channels in each bank may be paired refer to the channel numbering description on page 143 For example one drive might be State A and one drive State B on a switch Pairing channels allows settings and control to be shared between the two drives To pair channels use the ROUTe CHANnel DRIVe PAIRed MODE command When paired the lower and upper channel number on a bank are combined For example the following command pairs channel 1 and channel 11 on bank 1 ROUTe CHANnel DRIVe PAIRed MODE 81101 You may also pair all channels in a bank by specifying a range of channels ROUTe CHANnel DRIVe PAIRed MODE ON 81101 1108 Typically pairing is performed using the lower channel numbers in the bank You may set channel parameters using either the lower or upper channel number The settings will apply to both channels in the pair You must have the channel drive turned off before attempting to pair channels Channel drive is turned off by sending the ROUTe RMODule DRIVe SOURce OFF command Once a channel is paired only pulse drive is allowed on that channel Setting any of the following parameters applies the setting to both of the paired channels e ROUTe CHANnel DRIVe PULSe WIDTh ROUTe CHANnel DRIVe TIMe RECovery e ROUTe CHANnel DRIVe TIMe SETTle ROUTe CHANnel VERify
282. ve source be in order to allow execution ROUTe RMODule DRIVe SOURce OFF Distribution Boards Each 34945EXT remote module can hold up to four distribution boards Distribution boards are designed to support the most common types of Agilent microwave switches and attenuators The table below shows the distribution boards available and lists the supported switches and attenuators Y1150A Distribution board for up to eight N181x SPDT switches 9 pin Dsub connectors Y1151A Distribution board for two 87104x 106x multiport or 87406B matrix switches Y1152A Distribution board for a single 87204x 206x or 87606B switches and two N181x SPDTswitches Y1153A Distribution board for two 84904 5 8x or 8494 5 6 step attenuators Y1154A Distribution board for two 87222 transfer switches and up to six N181x SPDT switches Y1155A Distribution board with screw terminals for up to 16 switch drives Specific information for each distribution board and the supported switch types is given in the following sections Distribution boards are specialized terminal boards and hold no active electronic components The distribution boards can be identified by the system refer to the SYSTem CTYPe RMODule and SYSTem CDEScription RMODule commands description in the Programmers Reference Help file Channel drive attributes for each distribution board will be set to the values shown on page 153 L4400 User s Guide 1150 Microwave Switch Attenuator D
283. verwrite the previous definition no error is generated A sequence name can contain up to 30 characters The first character must be a letter A Z but the remaining 29 characters can be letters numbers 0 9 an underscore _ Blank spaces are not allowed When stored in memory the user defined sequence names are converted to all uppercase letters For example when stored 1 is converted to MYSEQ 1l A sequence may invoke another sequence but may not invoke itself recursively In addition the number of invocations is limited to four levels of nesting and this is enforced at the time of execution Exceeding the limit will abort the sequence and an error will be generated At the time of sequence definition a sequence may reference another undefined sequence however at the time of execution an error will be generated if an undefined sequence is invoked Up to 500 unique sequences can be stored in non volatile memory Each sequence is limited to 1024 bytes While a scan is running see Scanning Applications on page 69 the instrument prevents use of all channels in banks that contain one or more channels in the specified scan list these channels are dedicated to the scan Therefore if a sequence attempts to operate a channel in a scanned bank an error is generated and the entire sequence will be discarded f the command overlap function is enabled all switching operations within
284. vide the most common connections to Agilent microwave switches and attenuators screw terminal distribution board is also available for other devices A list of the available distribution boards is shown on page 154 The microwave switches or attenuators and the cables connecting them to the distribution boards are not supplied with the L4445A The cables and the remote modules allow the microwave switches and attenuators to be located closer to the device under test This helps to keep the signal transmission paths shorter and corresponding signal losses lower Microwave switches and attenuators have larger power requirements than other switch devices The L4445A instrument is able to power 24 Volt switches or attenuators on the first master remote module Additional remote modules slaves require an external power supply since no power is supplied through the expansion bus cable The first master remote module may use either an external power supply or the L4445A to supply high power devices or devices requiring drive voltages other than 24 Volt Each remote module has screw terminals for the external power supply connections L4400 User s Guide Microwave Switch Attenuator Driver 7 Figure 7 1 shows the components of the L4445A microwave switch attenuator driver configuration The L4445A driver is shown connected to a single 34945EXT remote module L4445A Instrument Driver 9 pin D SUB cable power to master 34945EXT Y1150A
285. volatile memory numbered 1 through 5 to store instrument states A sixth location stores the instrument s power down state which is restored when the instrument is turned back on You can assign a user defined name to each of locations 1 through 5 You can store the instrument state in any of the four locations but you can only recall a state from a location that contains a previously stored state When shipped from the factory storage locations 1 through 5 are empty In addition the automatic recall mode is disabled MEMory STATe RECall AUTO OFF command and a Factory Reset RST command is issued when power is turned on You can name a storage location but the location is recalled using the location number The name can contain up to 12 characters The first character must be a letter A Z but the remaining 11 characters can be letters numbers 0 9 or the underscore character _ Blank spaces are not allowed A Factory Reset RST command does not affect the configurations stored in memory Once a state is stored it remains until it is overwritten or specifically deleted The following commands are used to store and recall instrument states SAV 1 2 3 4 5 RCL 1 2 3 4 5 To configure the instrument to automatically recall location 2 when power is restored send the following commands SAV 2 MEM STATE RECALL SELECT 2 MEM STATE RECALL AUTO ON 14400 User s Guide Error Conditions Operating and P
286. w The voltage level that represents a logic 1 can be set using the SOURce DIGital LEVel command Output voltages can range from 1 66 V default to 5 V When the channel is set to OCOL1ector lines are driven low but set to high impedance Hi Z when asserted In the open collector mode multiple lines can be connected together by providing external pull ups When using external pull ups in the open collector mode the outputs will not exceed 5 V Once a channel has been configured write digital data to the channel using the SOURce DIGital DATA command SOUR DIG DATA LWOR 26503 91201 You may also use a hexadecimal format to represent values in the commands For example to send the decimal value of 26503 in hex use the command form SOUR DIG DATA LWOR h6787 091201 Writing to a channel automatically configures the channel as an output Note that the data should match the channel width configured using CONFigure DIGital DATA WIDTh command The data written is masked by the configured width so that any extra bytes will be discarded For example sending the value 65531 to a byte wide channel will result in the channel discarding the upper byte and outputting 251 Channel Width and Polarity Threshold Level and Drive When the width of a channel is set to WORD or LWORd the channel direction input or output of the channels spanned by the width is controlled by the channel in operation That is all grouped channels a
287. w LAN crossover cable provided with the instrument Note if your computer supports Auto MDIX or contains a LAN card with gigabit data transfer rates the yellow crossover cable is not required standard LAN cable can be used instead For private LAN networks that include a switch or router use standard LAN cables for network connections Do not use the crossover cable Once the LAN cables are connected you can turn on the L4400 instrument s L4400 User s Guide 19 2 20 Software Installation and Configuration Site Network Connections Figure 2 4 shows typical LAN cable connections for a site network Typical Site LAN Networks To Site LAN PC standard LAN cable L4400 Router Switch Ethernet Hub Switch Router To Site LAN fuu 0 09 00 0 y 8 ou MC L4400 L4400 L4400 L4400 Figure 2 4 Typical Site LAN Network Connections On site networks the L4400 instruments and the computer are connected directly to site LAN ports or are connected to the site LAN through a switch In each site network configuration standard LAN cables are used Once all LAN cables are connected turn on the L4400A instrument IP Addresses and Host Names Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP and Automatic IP
288. weeps through the scan list are complete Jo z 1 8 Bon 100 240V Oo ooooo 50 60 Hz gt C sa uses 5 gt UN uw 50VA Max N10149 L4421A ABus1 Lo VM Complete Ext Trig Out In Figure 3 14 External Scanning Using the L4421A and a DMM In this configuration you must set up a scan list to include all desired multiplexer channels Channels which are not in the list are skipped during the scan You can configure the event or action that controls the onset of each sweep through the scan list a sweep is one pass through the scan list The selected source is used for all channels in the scan list For more information refer to Scan Trigger Source on page 72 You can configure the event or action that notifies the instrument to advance to the next channel in the scan list Note that the Channel Advance source shares the same sources as the scan trigger However an error is generated if you attempt to set the channel advance source to the same source other than IMMediate used for the scan trigger You can specify the number of times the instrument will sweep through the scan list When the specified number of sweeps have occurred the scan stops For more information refer to Sweep Count on page 76 L4400 User s Guide 83 3 Operating and Programming Alarm
289. wever temporarily disable errors generated by the Safety Interlock feature This simulation mode may be useful during test system development when you may not have connected any terminal blocks or cables to your module CAUTION The Safety Interlock feature is implemented in hardware on the modules and cannot be circumvented Regardless of whether the simulation mode is enabled or disabled all Analog Bus operations are prohibited as long as no terminal block or properly wired cable is connected to the module L4400 User s Guide e When the simulation mode is enabled the Analog Bus relays will appear to close and open as directed For example no errors are generated if you close an Analog Bus relay from the remote interface or Web Interface However remember that the Safety Interlock feature prevents the actual hardware state of the Analog Bus relays from being changed When you connect a terminal block or cable to the module the Analog Bus relays will open and close normally 67 Operating and Programming The simulation setting is stored in volatile memory and will be lost when power is turned off To re enable the simulation mode after power has been off you must send the command again The command used is SYSTem ABUS INTerlock SIMulate OFF ON User Defined Channel Labels Usage All L4400 series instruments You can assign user defined labels to any channel including Analog Bus channels on the L4421A and L4433A instr
290. y NORMallINVerted ch list SENSe COUNIter GATE POLarity Q ch list SENSe COUNter GATE SOURce INTernallEXTernal ch list SENSe COUNter GATE SOURce ch list SENSe COUNter GATE TIME INTernal lt time gt IMINIMAXIDEF Q ch list SENSe COUNter GATE TIME INTernal MINIMAX ch list SENSe COUNter INITiate ch list SENSe JCOUNter PERiod DATA Q ch list SENSe COUNter PWIDth DATA Q ch list SENSe COUNter SLOPe NEGativelPOSitive G ch list SENSe COUNIter SLOPe Q ch list SENSe COUNter THReshold VOLTage lt voltage gt IMINIMAXIDEF lt ch_list gt SENSe COUNter THReshold VOLTage MINIMAX lt ch_list gt SENSe COUNter TOTalize CLEar IMMediate lt ch_list gt SENSe JCOUNter TOTalize DATA lt ch_list gt SENSe COUNter TOTalize TYPE READIRRESet lt ch_list gt SENSe COUNter TOTalize TYPE lt ch_list gt 14400 User s Guide 193 194 L4450A 64 Bit Digital 1 0 with Memory and Counter Digital SENSe MODule COUNter GATE THReshold VOL Tage lt voltage gt IMINIMAXIDEF 1 SENSe MODule COUNter GATE THReshold VOLTage MINIMAX 1 SENSe TOTalize CLEar IMMediate ch list SENSe TOTalize DATA Q ch list SENSe TOTalize SLOPe NEGativelPOSitive G ch list SENSe TOTalize SLOPe Q ch list SENSe TOTalize THReshold MODE ACITTL Q ch l

Philips 9FF2M4 Digital Photo Frame User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents